Home
        SE9380 - Riso.com
         Contents
1.                                                       4    Tilt the Master Disposal Box forward and directly  discard the used master into the garbage box  or  bag  by grasping the Push Out Lever                             3 Place the Master Disposal Box into  position     Grasp the Master Disposal Box handle and pull  the box forward                    T  Master Disposal Box handle                      Insert the Master Disposal Box until it stops     Important      e If the Master Disposal Box is padlocked  con   tact the administrator to undo it        Emptying the Master Disposal Box 209    Replacing Consumables    Important      e Dispose the ejected masters according to the  disposal rule of your local community    p 214    Note     e If necessary  slide the lever to the left to lock the  Master Disposal Box and also have the padlock  for further safety     p 182                               210 Emptying the Master Disposal Box       Replacing Consumables    Replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder     When replacing with a Color Print Drum  Cylinder  to change colors  or when removing jammed paper  follow the  steps to remove Print Drum  Cylinder   Be sure to use a Color Print Drum  Cylinder  specifically designed and  approved for use with this machine     A Caution   e Do not stand the Print Drum  Cylinder  upright  Doing so may stain the floor  etc   Important        Use only Print Drums  Cylinders  specifically designed and approved for use with this machine   e Keep t
2.                                              3 Touch  Rename      Program List    Close       Select a Button Name to be Changed                   Note       Each Program button has an icon on top left       indicates Single Page Mode Program  ra indi   cates Multi Page Mode Program     4 Select a program to rename     5 Touch character buttons to enter a  new name        Rename    rr     LILI ILL  Loe LAA  LILIE J AL  JLL ILL  ake LALO                         Change capitalization by selecting  Small  or   Capital  button     p 136   Note    e To delete the current name  touch button  or press the key     Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program  135    Advanced Features  When entered  touch  OK      Returns to the Program List Screen  The program  is renamed     136 Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program        Tip   Rename Screen    Small  Rename       rr        CILL LLL  QL ILL LL CULL                        Capital    Rename J           a  Fe    WILLY WILL  CC     LAA  LOLI CL LL  LOLI Ib Lb  LILI Le LULL                   Note   e You can enter up to 10 characters   e Print Quantity Keys may also be used for enter     ing numbers     e button or the key clears previously    saved or current entry  Touch to clear one char     acter at a time        Advanced Features    Retrieving a Program       Retrieve a stored program and modify its settings     4 Press the   P  key  4 Touch  OK         Single Page Mode OK            Program A  Total   1280    CII          G Cps  Sets  
3.                                  5 Touch the button of the number of  images to use     Single Original       Set the origin     in direction shown  in the right figure       To cancel the    Multi Up Print    settings or return to  the previous screen  touch  Cancel      76 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print     Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen     Multi Up Print     setting is updated    The reproduction size is automatically set accord   ing to the selected number of images based on  the paper size and original size to use     Make necessary settings     Make various settings as needed    When the reproduction size is set before setting  Multi Up Print  the reproduction size is invali   dated and changes to the size setting suitable  for the selected number of images    The image of the 2nd original and subsequent  originals can be changed to something different  from the image of the 1st original     Press the key     Scanning the original starts   After scanning has finished  follow the usual steps  to print        Important      After displaying the message     Place Another  Original and Press Start Key  To Cancel  Press  Stop Key    the machine waits for the next original  to be loaded  Set the next original and press pr   Press  4  to cancel the    Multi Up Print    mode   The Glass Platen and the optional ADF unit  cannot be used at the same time  If using the  Glass Platen to scan the first sheet of the origi   nal  you mu
4.                   Storage Selection  2 Touch  Storage Memory  on the fet  Loz  as  es ies fos         Functions Screen  1_folder Free Area  98MB 90    P 1 1    NewsLetter doc Admn Nov22 XX  Fax cover doc RISO Nov22 XX    OREA OVE CEDG  Selections Functions    Top Margin J ADF Semi Auto    Binding Margin J Preview      Newsletter doc RISO Nov22 XX  Images doc RISO Nov22 XX    ID Print Job     USB Job List      Max  Scan   Overlay   For details on how to select data  see steps 3 and   storage memory 4 in    Retrieving Stored Data and Printing    p 193     Ca  pm QD 4   Touch  Copy Move                              Note                  Storage Retrieve Cancel_  _Retrieve_   e When copying moving the data from the USB i Neweletterdoe i  Owner  Admn  Flash Drive to the Storage Memory  touch  USB Format  A4 Date amp Time  Nov22 XX 10 58          Meats tens     Job List       x    Newsletter       cop jmove   A Output    Al es  z 3h id    Color Black                      Preview  A          Copying Moving Stored Data 199    Storing Original Data and Use Method    5 Touch  Copy to  or  Move to      Copy Move  USB Flash Drive    1_usb_folder   B 3_usb_folder      4_usb_folder    B 5_usb_folder       B 6_usb_folder    Free Area  777KB  90         6 Touch the button of the destination  folder that you want to copy or move  the data     7 Touch  OK      Data is copied moved and the selected destina   tion folder is displayed     Important      e While processing the data  do not remove 
5.              ccecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 25  Materials Not to Be Printed               cccceeececeseeeees 19  Max  SCAM  5s ssccccs a a aaa a a a ae a 90  MOSSAGC s aena r a ant et 222  MESSAGE  ANCA yieee aeea a nae aaaea a E EERE 149  Meter Display ennaa as Ae a A 163  Mid ID Print Only                 c ceeeseeeeeeeetteeees 114  115  Minimum Print CE eisereen onere 171  MODE KOV ea A A AA 24  Monthly Reminder               eeceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeetrens 162  Moving Stored Data 0 0 0    eeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeteeerees 199  Multi Page Mode    nsien 130  133  134  135  Multiple Paper Feed Detection                    0  103  Multiple Original             ceeceeceeeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 71  Multi Up function 00    cc cceceteeceeesteeesseeeees 71  76  Multi Up Interval            ccc ceccsseeceessseesseeees 74  169  Multi Up Print           ccc ccccccccesssseeeesssseesseeeees 71  76  Multi Up Tickets          ccccccccccssseeeessseeesseeeees 74  78  My Counter 00    eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 202  My Direct ACCESS      cceecteceescceceneceteceeeenenereceteneees 164  N   Non ID Print   0 0 0 0    ccccccccssssseeeeeeeceessseeeeeeessseeeees 193    263    264    Index    O   OP Auto Process   niiit enpote i  167  Operation Environment                   cecsceeeeeeeeeeeees 12  Operation flow of User Management                   116  Operation Safety Guide ooo    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 12  Optional Accessories                cceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeteeees 256  
6.              ececeeeee 61  Entering the User Name    n e 122  Error Messages         eeeeceeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeatens 222  Ex  Reserve Period             ccccccccccccessssseeeeees 148  169  Extended Paper             2   ce cccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 180  Extended Paper Mode                    cccceeeeeeeteeeees 180  External CI Info           eeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaes 169    F   Feed Tray Ascent   Descent Button                 20  36  Feed Tray Paper Guide             eceeceeceeeeeereeeeeees 20  Fanges ith  dk ete eect eee eee 205  Folder Renaming           cecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeneeeeees 168  FOMMAG  Ak ceva th Fic pect ane whet ck ome Re keke 192  FICC  ses See Se ee 63  Front Cover daona 3s aie ae kath etek 21  Function and Name of Each Part                  e 20  Functions  Area nsaria aain he ered 31  Functions SCION  ssrdsn 27  G   Gauge Cover ou    eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeneeeaeeees 41  Glass Platen hrano RE TAN 41  217  Group enirere ap aean p a trni e 123  129  H   HIGH Speed  anaa A N ek eee 97  High Full Management               ceeeeeeeeees 114  115  Humidity Range           ccecceeceeeceeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12  l      Information      soooonnnnnooeeennnnnneessnnnnnnesssernnnne 31  203  Icons Used in This Manual                cccccecesseeeeeerees 8  ID Counter Report            cc cccccccceseeeeeseeees 160  161  ID  Print  is EEE tees Boece ates Aedes Bates te Les eed 52  ID Print JOD ooo    ieee cccccc
7.          key    key can be set to function as    Mode Selection       or    Loop        Select    Mode Key Pattern    on the Admin  Screen     Touch the Mode button on the Mode Screen to view  the Basic Screens of various modes        Mode Key Pattern       as  rs  aonn oa    oc    Mode  Selection Loop           Mode Selection  Pressing the key will open     Loop     30 Display    the Mode Screen no matter  which screen you are currently  on     The screen changes as shown    below when the     key is  pressed     e Normally     Master Making  BasicScreen    lt      gt       PrintBasic  Screen         When the optional Document  Storage Card is installed      Scan Basic Screen     lt   gt      Master Making Print Basic  Screen       Tip    About the Recognition Screen   This machine is equipped with a User Management  function    p 114   p 166    Admin       If    User Manage   ment    is set  the Recognition Screen is displayed  If one  of the screens shown below is displayed  input the PIN  Code or connect the registered USB Flash Drive  Con   sult your administrator for the PIN Code and the regis   tered USB Flash Drive     PIN Code Input Screen    Input the PIN code             Registered USB Flash Drive Screen    Insert the registered  USB flash drive    z     e       Getting Acquainted       Basic Screen Layout       The name and function of each area of all Basic Screens are described below  The display of the Basic Screen differs  depending on whether you are scanning
8.         212 Replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder        Installing the Print Drum  Cylinder     Replacing Consumables       1 Place the Print Drum  Cylinder  on  the Rail                    Align the W mark on the Print Drum  Cylinder   with the A mark on the guide  and place the Print  Drum  Cylinder  horizontally onto the guide     Note     e Ifthe Print Drum  Cylinder  was manually  rotated  be sure to turn it back so that  gt  and  lt   marks align  after it is placed on the guide                    Return the Print Drum  Cylinder  to  its original position                                      Push the Print Drum  Cylinder  in as far as it will  go  and then close the Front Cover        Important         Do not grasp the Print Drum  Cylinder  Handle  when pushing in the Print Drum  Cylinder      Tip    Changing the Print Drum  Cylinder  Type  When you install a different type of Print Drum   Cylinder   the Confirm Print Drum  Cylinder   Type screen appears     O Ready to Make Master  F17        The Print Drum Type  has been Changed    Select the Current  Print Drum Type    A4 R Drum          1  Select the type corresponding to the installed  Print Drum  Cylinder     2  Touch  OK    The Print Drum  Cylinder  type is confirmed  and printing is enabled     Important      e You will not be able to print until the Print  Drum  Cylinder  type is confirmed    e If you install a non approved Color Print  Drum  Cylinder   the message    Wrong   Type Print Drum Installed Replace with
9.         When magnifying  make sure to prepare  paper that fits the enlarged size        7 Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen     Multi Up Tick   ets    setting is updated           Multi Up Tickets 8 Make necessary settings     Make various settings as needed     9 Press the key     Starts scanning the original    Numeric keypad is      available for input  After this  please follow the same operations for    normally printing   Set the original  in direction shown Note   in the right figure     z    e To cancel a    Multi Up Print    setting once it has   been confirmed  follow step 2  touch  OFF  and    then  OK  on the screen        You can specify the    Page Width        Multi Up Tickets          6 Touch  a  or QJ to specify the short  edge size of the original  the width      Multi Up Tickets       Page Width        Numeric keypad is  available for input      Numeric keypad is        50 210    available for input     Set the original  in direction shown  in the right figure          Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print  79    Functions for Master Making    Laying out continuous originals on one  sheet of paper  Layout     Continuously arranging several originals on one sheet of paper is called    Layout       This function is convenient when you want to save paper and make stapled documents   Important     e    Layout    function cannot be used with    Auto 90  Rotation        Setting items      Page Size setting  Set the size of o
10.       Default Image Processing mode can be set on the Admin  Screen   p 169 Coasts    v  v  v  v  Contrast Adj   m       4 Touch  Page  on the Master Making Touch Photo   puo  or  Pencil  to  Tone Gave See  2 Basic Screen  tailed setings   Image v available     notavailable  OReady to Make Master  Detailed Description  settings    In the  Line  mode  when  Contrast  is set to   Photo   Auto   the background color of the original is  automatically deleted   Standard   Select for photos other thar p62  or  Group    Portrait Use this setting for pictures           two individuals from the bu  type of image processing is  good for printing photos of                            Bik a  Give  Group This setting is for group pho   over exposed  This process   2 Select the appropriate Image for restoring facial features  Processing mode for the original  become washed out by a fi       The Group setting is not for  faces that are overly dark     more effective to select  St                                           such photos     Duo    Tine Select to print small text cid  Photo Select to print photos more    Shadow off   Select to clear the backgro             the dark color originals  su                                  newspapers    a sd a      Shadow off  is selectable     Line   Only text contained  e g   text docu   Line  and  Photo    ment  newspaper Pencil      Photo Only photos contained Darker Select to print faint original     Duo Both text and photos contained    il   penc
11.       Q DENsITy          mei  e   LIGHT 1 2 3 4 5 DARK    gis                AWD    PH  EDEDED  aww             1  Print Density Adjustment Indicator  Shows the current setting of the print density     2     gt   Key    Increases the print density incrementally     3  Ca   Key    Decreases the print density incrementally        The default print density can be set on the Admin  Screen     When  ECO mode  is set  the default print density is    1      The print density may be adjusted while in ECO mode     Adjusting the Print Density  Print Density Adjustment  99    Functions for Printing    Adjusting the Print Position     Print Position Adjustment     The print position on the paper can be adjusted    Adjustment range Vertical direction  bottom  lt   gt  top    15 mm    19 32    Horizontal direction  left  lt     gt  right    10 mm   25 64     The positioning may be adjusted while printing is in progress     Note     e After adjusting the print position  print a proof copy to check the result   p 102      The numerical value formed by    Print Position Adjustment    is the target  Set the actual position by verifying and  adjusting the printed material     Press the  47  Gv   a or f  key to  move up or down  3  p  Key    Each press shifts the print position upward in steps of  about 0 5 mm  1 64           gt       Bottom  lt  gt  Top                                             4  Key Original Position Indicator  Press to return to original position     a       GID    Q pensr
12.      22 Function and Name of Each Part    Getting Acquainted    Optional Devices       Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  The Feeder can hold approximately 50 original sheets  80 g m   21 lb bond    Place the original face down    p 41        1  ADF Original Receiving Tray 3  ADF Original Guides  Scanned originals are ejected into this tray  Slide and adjust to the width of the originals to hold them  2  ADF Original Release Lever   p 228  together     If an original is jammed  pull this lever to the right to eject  it from the ADF unit   Auto Document Feeder DX 1    The Feeder can hold approximately 50 original sheets  80 g m   21 Ib bond     p 41   Both sides of the original can be scanned automatically  Select the side  front or reverse  to be scanned    p 158        1  ADF Cover   p 229  3  ADF Original Receiving Tray  Jammed or misfed originals can be removed from the Scanned originals are ejected into this tray   ADF unit by opening this cover     2  ADF Original Guides    Slide and adjust to the width of the originals to hold them  together     Function and Name of Each Part 23    Getting Acquainted       Control Panel    The Control Panel features permanent keys such as E  and Ge  It also has a large size display that shows various  messages and function buttons   This section describes hardware key names and functions  as well as the display window and its functions     1     2     4     5     6     7     8     9     1 2    Basic Selections Functions    Page  A4 Contrast
13.      3 Enter the number of copies using the  Print Quantity Keys   The number is displayed on the Print Quantity Dis     OR CEU NMCMVELCENERCH play     Note     Basic   Selections  W Functions f Admin     To change the number  press the key     then re enter the correct number     4 Press the key           Top Margin J ADF Semi Auto  Binding Margin 3 P N         Reservation   Storage Memory J       ADF Semi Auto    is selected     Note   e When    ADF Semi Auto    is not displayed  or dis              START A   om  E    played in gray   turn off the    Auto Process    key  on the Control Panel     2 Place original s  in the ADF unit                    The ADF unit detects the document  and automat   ically opens the Master Making Basic Screen   To place the original     p 41        After a master is made  a proof copy is printed and  the job stops     Check the proof copy     Make adjustments if needed     Press the key     The machine prints specified number of copies   Master for the next original is made  its proof copy  is printed  then the machine stops again     Repeat steps 5 and 6     Proof and Print  only when the ADF unit is installed   ADF Semi Auto  155    Advanced Features    Selecting Scanning Sides When Using the  Auto Document Feeder DX 1   Scanning Side  ADF     When scanning originals using the optional Auto Document Feeder DX 1  there are three scanning side options      Front Side        Back Side     or    Duplex       Important     e If the original is s
14.     Advanced Features    0 Touch character buttons to enter a  new name     Rename    ERCE  ara EEEN EN EN E    CoE IL L LLL  CI ETES COLI  ERES ES ESLEI ES ES  LALL LILLA       Change capitalization by selecting  Small  or   Capital  button   p 136    Note   e To clear the current name  touch button or    press the key     11 Touch  OK  when done     Note   e To change a name  repeat from step 8     12 Confirm the name and touch   Close      Returns to the Admin  Screen  Feed Tray  Paper   is updated     Registering a Custom Paper Size  Custom Paper Entry  179    Advanced Features    Tip    Printing on Extended Paper   The machine can print on paper 436 mm 555 mm   175 32  2127 32   long  top to bottom facing the  paper feeding direction  by storing the size as a  custom size     p 178   When entering a size longer than 436 mm  175 32     top to bottom facing the paper feed direction  on  the Custom Paper Entry Screen  the paper will be  treated as    Extended Paper       When    Extended Paper    is selected on the Feed  Tray  Paper  screen  the machine switches into     Extended Paper    mode     Important      e Some Extended Paper may fail to pass through  the machine due to its paper characteristics  or  may get smudged with Ink due to its image  positioning  Consult your dealer  or authorized  service representative  for advice        Extended Paper    Mode    e When the machine is on    Extended Paper     mode  it is indicated in the message area as  either    Ready t
15.     Important     e After printing is completed  press the key to  log out before leaving the machine  If you do not  log out  the logged in state will remain until     Auto Clear    is activated  During this time  any   one can use the machine  as you  without log   ging in    p 170       Printing from a Paper Document or Book 47    Basic Operations    Printing from a Computer Data   Direct Print   USB Job List     This machine can directly print the original created on the computer by connecting the computer and machine by a cable   The data will be digitally processed into a master  thus achieving higher quality prints than the master making of  scanned originals    Furthermore  a USB slot for connecting a USB Flash Drive is supplied with this machine so that you can print by con   necting a USB Flash Drive that stores the data of originals to the machine even if the computer and machine are not  connected by a cable     USB Flash Drive                      e                ea      1                                    Im                                            va HEHE    Connect the USB Flash Drive  to the USB slot    Note   e First  install a proper printer driver on your computer  See the RISO Printer Driver User   s Guide for installation details   e Document data created on your PC can be stored in the optional Document Storage Card attached to the machine     e This manual provides only a summary of functions available when printing from a computer   See RISO Print
16.     Troubleshooting    J00 000 Paper Jam Error    Displays when the original document or printing paper is jammed  inside the machine  the ADF unit  option     The location of the paper jam is indicated by the flashing icon        in the illustration  Refer to the table below           and  resolve the issue as indicated     Note     e Use appropriate printing paper to prevent paper jams  Also  select appropriate original document suitable for the ADF unit   p 16  p 18       J08    Paper Jam  Remove Paper in Indicated Areas    aand Press  OK  Button                       Area Possible Cause  Indicated   Blinking    Action       Paper is jammed in the Paper Feed area           1  Check the paper feed side and remove the    jammed paper     2  Touch  OK      Note        When using special paper  adjust the  Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever  according to the paper characteristics   p 34       The original is jammed in the optional ADF unit                For Auto Document Feeder AF VI II    Removing in the document insertion direction  Pull the ADF Original Release Lever to the  right  and pull out the original                    ADF Original Release Lever    Removing in the document ejection direction  Raise Platen Cover  turn the ADF Original  Release Dial and remove the original        Original Release Dial                228 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting       Area Possible Cause Action  Indicated   Blinking          The original is jammed in the optional
17.     Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line   Used buttons are grayed out and are not avail   able     134 Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program        4 Touch  OK      Program List          Sele        S     Regi  P 04      This Setting will be    Retr  Registered  OK     Ren    Cl  SSS                        Returns to the Program List Screen  The Program  is stored    You can name each program for your conve   nience  See step 3 in    Renaming a Program            p 135      Note     After saving the Program  touch  Close  on the  Program List Screen to return to the Program  Screen    Touch  OK  on the Program Screen to print  from a saved Program        Single Page Mode          OK     P 04  Total 1280  G Cps  Sets   G  Cps  Sets Enti u   001   ET   x aJ  004 sol  x 5                                                                 x x  003 40 E  006 70 10   Clear All          Advanced Features    Renaming a Program       Program names can be changed to better describe their usage or purpose     Touch  Program  on the Functions  Screen     O Ready to Make Master  Selections    Functions    Job I i Multi Up Print  Contrast Adj J Book Shadow J             Note        If  Program  is already highlighted  touching it  will again display the Program Screen  and not  the Rename a Program Screen   Touch  Cancel Job  then  OK  to return to the  Functions Screen  Touch  Program  again     2 Touch  Program List       amp   a  gi    Multi    Program List J    at             
18.     is changed  all settings in User Management  including the administrator s registration  will be    cleared     1 Touch  Admin   on the Basic Screen  for each mode     OREA OREL CRER GI    Contrast Size    100     Page  A4  Papell Wy         Black          2 Touch  OK      OREA OREL ERG    Resets current settings  once opened    C             Skip to step 4 if the administrator is not registered   If the administrator is already registered  the Rec   ognition Screen is displayed here    See step 3        3 Identify the administrator       When    Recognized by    is set to     PIN Code       Input the administrator s PIN Code     OLEA ORV ELCA ERIGI    Input the PIN code         When    Recognized by    is set to     USB Flash Drive       Connect the administrator s registered USB  Flash Drive to the USB slot     ONC NA CRVELCRUERICH    Insert the registered  USB flash drive    z     r    Cancel       Setting Up User Management  User Management  117    Advanced Features    4 Touch  User Management      Power OFF Schedule    OFF  User Management J    i   OFF    Auto Idling     12hour  Auto Page Renewal     OFF    C4  pst e          5 Touch  Recognized by      User Management    Select management level    Management Level    High Full Management    Input user and group information    Reset all counters Select recognition method       6 Touch the button to select the    Rec   ognized by    option     Recognized by    PIN Code    USB Flash Drive      h    OFF  Delete       No
19.     n  2 Erasure Width        gt   AEOEL eter    If you set    Process    to    OFF     you cannot select     Page split           86 Printing from Bound Documents  Book Shadow        4  Touch  B5    A4    B4  or  A3  for the    magazine or book you have placed     Note   e Select the size of the bound original     5 Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen      Book Shadow    setting is updated     Note     e When    Page split    is set  the original is scanned  twice     A        B       e In this case     B    is printed first     Important     e When    Page split    is set  use A4 or B5 as print   ing paper       Tosetthe reproduction size  it is recommended  to use  Auto        Make sure to set the printing paper in the orien   tation shown in the figure below  the long side  points in the direction of transfer           gt     Paper output direction             Functions for Master Making    Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and  Printing  Top Margin     You can cut the top portion of the margin to between 0 to 99 mm  0 0  to 3 9   and make a master    This feature enables you to skip the Registration marks    on the original and print on the finish sized paper without any  of these marks      About the Registration Mark   In the field of commercial printing  it is normal to print on paper that is larger than the finished size and then cut down to  the finished size afterwards  The symbol that indicates the position to cut in this event is known as the regi
20.    Please contact following for supplies and service     sees J   OS    OPINED SAOSA     086 086    RISO       RISO SE Series    User s Guide    9480 9380       056 36003    p N As an ENERGY STAR   Partner  RISO KAGAKU CORP  has determined    that this product meets the ENERGY STAR   guidelines for energy  efficiency     Greeti          For SE9480U Model Only   Duplicator   Model  SE9480U   RFID System   Model  050 34901   Contains FCC ID  RPARFR6   This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject to the following two conditions   1  this  device may not cause harmful interference  and  2  this device must accept any interference received  including  interference that may cause undesired operation     The user is cautioned that unauthorized changes or modifications not approved could the user   s authority to  operate the equipment     NOTE  This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device  pursuant to part  15 of the FCC Rules  These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  residential installation  This equipment generates  uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and  if not installed and  used in accordance with the instructions  may cause harmful interference to radio communications  However  there is no  guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation  If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  radio or television re
21.    Size  Page  A4 Recommend  122   Margin    Paper  B4 Current  100     x 94      1 61  As   B5     122  Be BF          eRe   oe EE  82  B4ad     163  B5   A3  Free    a Mog  7 B4  gt A3  M J  Lvs BEE       3 Touch  a  or 5 to adjust zoom ratio  in horizontal or vertical directions        Size            RY   gt    Vertical     50 200        rN    Horizon    Rp          Numeric keypad is     50 200  available for input     ZT eyo          The reproduction size can be increased   decreased in increments of 1         Enlarging Reducing Originals  Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto   Free   Zoom  63    Functions for Master Making    Enlarging and Reducing with the Zoom Function  Zoom        1 Touch  Size  on the Master Making  Basic Screen     OU NE CRVELGCRIENGH  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast          Multi Up  Print     Gy Black                         Size       Page  A4 Recommend  122   Harsin    Paper  B4 Current  100      x 94      81  A3   B5     122  fe BE    Auto   71  RABE     imo Aa BE          82  B4    A4 163  B5   A3  E        i BEE       Size  Pagi Zoom Cancel   OK      ETYEN     gt   ETI     at     50 200                              Vv             Numeric keypad is available for input        _             The reproduction size can be increased   decreased in increments of 1         Note   e Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter  numbers       Press the key to restore the original size   100       Touch  OK      Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen      S
22.    What is the WEEE Directive     The purpose of the WEEE Directive is to reduce waste and ensure Electrical and  Electronic Equipment is recycled at the end of its useful life     What does the crossed out wheeled bin symbol mean   The crossed out wheeled bin symbol indicates this product must be disposed of  separately to normal waste     Please contact your RISO service agent for information about disposal     What does the solid bar symbol mean   The solid bar under the crossed out wheeled bin indicates this product was put on the    market after the 13th August 2005     Who should I contact if   want more information about the  WEEE Directive     You should contact your local RISO service agent for more information     Riso shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of  this manual    As we are constantly improving our products  the machine may differ in some respects  from the illustrations used in this manual  i   Riso shall not be liable for any direct  incidental  or consequential damages of any nature   or losses or expenses resulting from the use of this product or included manuals    A Caution    e Make sure to read the important operational safety information    e Store this manual close by  and fully acquaint yourself with the printing machine     RISO is a registered trademark of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION in Japan and other countries   RISO    Quality System    is a trademark of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION    is a trademark of R
23.    o  7  Pal       To restore the original Print Position during printing  hold       SEY the button down for more than 1 second   we N When the original Print Position is restored the indicator  i will light up     5  ly Key    Press the key to move the print image about 0 5 mm                         1  Key  1le4   to the right on the paper   Each press shifts the print position downward in steps of  about 0 5 mm  1 64    Left Side   gt                                                           gt  Right Side    Bottom  lt 2 106p The Print Basic Screen shows current vertical horizon   tal adjustment              2  C47 Key                                  Press the key to move the print image about 0 5 mm Select Print Quantity   1 64   to the left on the paper   O  Print Position   gt    High Speed  Right Side                                        100 Adjusting the Print Position  Print Position Adjustment     Tip    Making Fine Adjustments to the Print Position   If the    Fine Adjust Mode    option is included in the  machine settings  you can make detailed adjustments  to the Print Position in approximately 0 1 mm  1 254    increments  ordinary mode is 0 5 mm  1 g4       To use    Fine Adjust Mode    settings  please contact your  dealer  or authorized service representative     When    Fine Adjust Mode    is available  the button  Fine  Adjust Mode  is displayed on the Functions Screen   Touch  Fine Adjust Mode  to turn    Fine Adjust Mode     ON  the button is highligh
24.    ommend that you activate the    Reservation     setting when printing leaflets  etc  to prevent  interruption    p 148    Easily restore the current settings by saving  them into memory  Saved settings can be  retrieved even when the key is pressed  or  after turning the power off    p 140    12 Press the key when print job is    complete        The setting returns to its default value     Note     e After printing is completed  the master remains  on the Print Drum  Cylinder   To protect confi   dential documents from unauthorized duplica   tion  use the    Confidential    feature to discard  the master after printing     p 147   e Even if you do not press the key  with the  passage of a certain amount of time  factory  default settings  5 minutes   the settings will be  automatically reset    p 140    Printing from a Paper Document or Book 45    Basic Operations    Remove the printed paper     Open the Receiving Tray Paper Guides and  remove the paper                    For the machine equipped with the Auto control  Stacking Tray  press the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides    Opening Button and remove the paper     Tip    Auto Idling   When    Auto Idling    is set to ON  idling operations  may be activated when master making process is  initiated    Factory default is set to idle automatically at the  beginning of the master making when the  machine is inactive for over 12 hours    To toggle    Auto Idling    ON OFF  or to modify the  number of hours before activating next
25.   Button mellveled Direction  component       Stopper Towards the  machine          Narrower    lt                         Outwards on  the Auto control  Stacking Tray   p Wider        _      gt                        112 Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl                                      Button Activated Direction  component  Receiving Tray Inwards on the  Paper Guides Auto control  Stacking Tray   3 Narrower         Outwards on  the Auto control  Stacking Tray   Wider    l     4 Touch  Close    Special Paper Ctrl  Receive Tray                      Side    ej End   0 5mm    a J     gt   2 0mm  Z Narrower                Narrower               Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl Screen   5 Touch  Close      Special Paper Ctrl       Entry Call    Paper Feed Adj     S Tray Upper Limit  Paper Feed Amount  Air Blow    Paper Eject Adj    Separation Fan    Pre suction Fan  Suction Fan          Returns to the Functions Screen     You can go back to normal printing processes        Note     Functions for Printing    e Settings can be saved in    Special Paper Ctrl      for easy retrieval next time    p 107    Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl  113    Advanced Features    Setting Up User Management  User Management     Functions of User Management       This machine is equipped with a User Management function to ensure security and enhance user ma
26.   Confidential     After printing is complete  the master remains on the Print Drum  Cylinder  and is ready for printing another set of  copies  To protect confidential documents from unauthorized duplication  use the Confidential feature to discard the  master after printing     Note    When    Confidential    is performed  the discarded master may no longer be reproduced  and    Renew Page    feature  is disabled    If    Idling Action    is set to    ON        Idling Action    is executed using a confidential master  use this function when not  using the Print Drum  Cylinder  for extended period of time      You can set the machine to remind users to use the    Confidential    feature every time it is used   p 182    Make sure printing is completed   Confirm that everything is printed     Touch  Confidential  on the Func   tions Screen     O Ready to Make Master    Selections Functions    Editor J Ink Saving  Interval  Renew Page  Confidential J     lt i          th       3         4    v          3 Touch  OK      Select Print Quantity    Confidential Cancel  L ox            Confidential Mode       The current master is discarded  and a new mas   ter is set on the Print Drum  Cylinder         Protecting Confidential Documents  Confidential  147    Advanced Features    Extending the Reserve Period  Reservation     This function is useful when the machine is connected to a computer  When the machine is inactive for a certain  period of time  it determines that the current jo
27.   Correct Type    is displayed  Install a Color  Print Drum  Cylinder  specifically approved  for use with this machine     Replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder  213    Replacing Consumables    Disposal of Depleted Consumables    Dispose of depleted Ink Cartridges  Master cores  ejected masters according to the regulations in your local commu   nity   If required  separate the specific components using the following procedures to dispose them properly       Ink Cartridge    Remove the label  metal included  at the arrow from the outlet surface of the Ink Cartridge  and then dispose them  separately   Because Ink may have adhered to the outlet surface of the Ink Cartridge  be careful not to smudge your clothes                    Parts Materials  Ink Cartridge material plastic  polypropylene polyethylene   Label material plastic  metal included   Ink Soy oil  petroleum hydrocarbons  water  pigments               Master core    A metallic component has been attached to the bottom of the end section having the  i  mark stamped   Because the component section has been perforated for cutout convenience  tear along the perforation for proper                disposal   Parts Materials  Core material Paper  Master material plastic  Japanese paper  Material of the cutout component plastic  metal included  and paper                214 Disposal of Depleted Consumables       Replacing Consumables      Ejected Master                Parts Materials  Master material plastic  Japanese paper  Ink
28.   Cylinder       Action   Set the original and create a master     Touch  Close    Set the original and create a master     Important      e Donotleave the Print Drum  Cylinder   without a master  This dries out the  Print Drum  Cylinder  and causes  damage  You must either create a  master or perform a    Confidential     operation to wrap a master around the  Print Drum  Cylinder         Original size exceeds  limitation of layout  Specify the original size     Symptom      Layout    is not available for the original  size     When changing the    Original Size     setting    Touch  Original Size     When resuming the print job        Limitation of Multi Up  Specify Original Size             Multi Up       is not available for the original  size      Action   Specify the original size   p 71        Action  Saa Touch  Continue    Specify the original size   Alternatively  press the key to print    p 80    When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or  the GZ  key to clear    Original Size Exceeds  Symptom  e When changing the    Original Size       setting    Touch  Original Size     When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue      Alternatively  press the key to print    When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key or  the E  key to clear         236 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message       Original Undetected  Reset Original     S
29.   Original when Printing      p 86    a 4  Touch  OK    ee Returns to the Functions Screen     Book Shadow     P  4 4    5 setting is updated     1 Touch  Book Shadow  on the Func   tions Screen                  all       Touch  Erase  or  Halftone  for     Process           Book Shadow    Process Erasure Width    OFF   Auto        30mm   40mm   Ad      Page Size      Page split    A ap        OFF   Book Shadow is not performed         Erase   Erases shadows near the center and  around the original   Select the size of spread original from    Page  Size       e  Halftone   Photo processes the center  shadow for a natural feel and deletes shadows  that it can around the original                           ae  a  oO   oO  ao  N  oO       43                 Da  Erasure Width    3 Touch  Erasure Width  and  Page   Size     e If you set    Process    to    Halftone     you can only  select    Auto       e If you set    Erasure Width    to    Auto     original  detection is performed automatically  and the  erasure width is calculated from the detected  size        Printing from Bound Documents  Book Shadow  85    Functions for Master Making    Splitting Facing Pages of a Bound Original when Printing     Page split        1 Touch  Book Shadow  on the Func   tions Screen     ORCC NAOMI EG ERG     Selections Functions    Program J Tone Curve J  Job Memory J Multi Up Print J  Book Shadow J    a PD                   Touch  Erase  or  Halftone  for     Process        Book Shadow         
30.   Storage Memory    allows  you to store original data on the internal optional Document Storage Card of the printing machine     USB Flash Drive     allows you to store original data in a USB Flash Drive  Both methods can store original data as follows     e Storing data from a hard copy original by using the scanner of the machine   e Storing original data created on a computer     The methods of storing data from a hard copy original and printing the stored original data are explained here   Details on how to store the data created on a computer  see the    RISO Printer Driver User s Guide     CD ROM         Store Retrieve and print          Originals scanned in  scan mode                          Original data sent from      Document a computer    Storage Card A                          Original data storage   Storage Memory         Storage Memory                                                              Document Storage Card          Document Storage Card       USB Flash Drive            Stored original data  created on a computer     Stored original data  scanned in scan mode  USB Flash Drive   USB Flash Drive    JA yO       USB Flash Drive                                                                                   Original data  retrieval                      Storing Original Data and Use Method    e The following operations are available with data stored in    Storage Memory    or    USB Flash Drive            Stored original data can be repeatedly retrieved 
31.   When changing a setting     has been Selected  Change Print Drum  or  Reselect Print Drum Size    You have selected a different Print Drum   Cylinder  than the one currently in  place  as confirmed in the Confirm Print  Drum  Cylinder  Type screen when it  was installed      Action    Select the type of Print Drum  Cylinder   currently installed    Alternatively  you can change the Print  Drum  Cylinder     p 211    In the Confirm Print Drum  Cylinder   Type screen  select the type of Print  Drum  Cylinder  currently installed  and touch  OK      When installing a different Print  Drum  Cylinder     Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  replace with the correct one     When the Print Drum  Cylinder  is re   installed  the Warning Message will  clear        I  Layout is not available  with this paper size     Replace with proper paper  of standard size     Symptom    Layout functions cannot be used when  custom sized papers are set in the  Paper Feed Tray      Action    Load standard size paper in the Paper  Feed Tray    p 34    Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the    key to clear            I  Multi Up is Not Available  with This Paper Size     Replace with Proper Paper  of Standard Size        Symptom   Multi up functions cannot be used when    custom sized paper is in the Feed Tray      Action   Load standard size paper in the Feed  Tray        Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear            When a Message Displays 235    Tr
32.   e With an interactive guidance system  highly sophisticated printer settings can be made with ease   e 180ppm 185ppm ultra high speed printing gets the job done faster than ever before    e 600dpi resolution High Quality printing will give you clear and crisp documents     About This User   s Guide    This machine comes with the following four user   s guides       RISO SE9480 SE9380 User   s Guide  this manual     This user   s guide explains basic printer operations  handy tips  and how to set up the high speed print function  It  also contains user cautions  information on storing and changing consumables  and troubleshooting procedures       RISO Editor User   s Guide  This user   s guide explains the RISO Editor functions     RISO Printer Driver User   s Guide  included as a PDF file in the attached CD ROM   This user   s guide explains the procedures for printing from a computer     RISO Utility Software User   s Guide  CD ROM   This user   s guide explains how to use the    RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER    and    RISO USB PRINT MANAGER        This manual shows you the machine   s basic and advanced operations using various functions  It also contains cau   tionary notes  usage and replacement information on consumable supplies and troubleshooting tips    Please read this manual carefully before using this machine  Reference at any time as needed for more tips and  ideas     Welcome to the SE Series Model    7    8    Icons Used in This Manual    The following icons are used
33.   p 149    Renew Page    p 150    Scanning Side  ADF 2   p 156    This setting is available when the Auto Docu   ment Feeder DX 1  option  is installed        44 Printing from a Paper Document or Book       e Overlay      p 197   This setting is available when the Document  Storage Card  option  is attached     e Job Separation 4  This setting is available when the Job Separator   option  is installed   e Storage Memory      p 193    4 This setting is available only when the Auto   control Stacking Tray  optional  is installed    2 This setting is available only when the Auto  Document Feeder DX 1  optional  is installed    3 This setting is available when the optional ADF  unit is installed    4 This setting is available when the optional Job  Separator is installed    5 This setting is available only when a memory  card  optional  is attached     Check the Paper Receiving Tray     Adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides and Paper Stopper to match the size of  the paper used     Press the key      lt  START a  D    Starts scanning the original  A master is made  once the scanning is completed  and a proof copy  will be printed     Note        When    Auto Process    is selected  the process  will be different   p 66   e You can change the settings of    Auto Idling      p 171       9 Check the proof copy result     Select Print Quantity       Selections Functions    Print Position    Paper           High Speed                           D Feed  Check       Bla
34.   the time of delivery     Installation       AWARNING       Place the machine on the dedicated stand for this model or on a flat and stable surface  maximum of 10 mm  25 64  inches  differential allowed   Injury might occur if the machine falls     A Caution     Install the machine near the electrical outlet to avoid using an extension cord between the machine and the elec   trical outlet     Allow at least 10 cm  4 inches  or more of clearance behind the machine so that you can unplug the machine in  case of technical difficulties     Keep the machine away from dusty environments  Failure to do so may result in fire   Install the machine in a well ventilated area     Important    e Avoid installing the machine in the locations listed below  Failure to observe this precaution may lead to machine  failure         Locations with exposure to direct sunlight  such as locations close to windows  Curtain all windows that might  expose the machine to direct sunlight     Locations that are subject to sudden changes in temperature    Extremely hot and humid locations or cold and dry locations        Heated locations    Locations exposed to direct cold air  direct hot air  or direct radiant heat      Poorly ventilated locations    Power connection       AWARNING    Use with the machine s rated voltage value  Also  plug into an electrical outlet with a capacity larger than the rated  current value    For the rated voltage value and rated current value  check the  Power Source  entry of
35.  16       The position of the Paper Feed  Pressure Adjustment Lever was  inappropriate     When using thick or slippery paper  set the  Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to     Thick Paper       p 34          Multi up did not function   There is nothing printed on    one side     Z    Did you place the second original in  time after the beep  while the  message    Place Another Original and  Press Start Key    was showing     When you print using    Multi Up     the  machine will beep during the Multi Up  Interval  Place the second original during  that interval    If the machine starts scanning for the second  time without a beep  even when you are  scanning from the Glass Platen  you will  need to adjust    Multi Up Interval    settings on  the Admin  Screen      p 173          Did you accidentally press the    key while the original was being  scanned        The print operation will stop if the key  is pressed while scanning is in progress    Do not press the key until all originals  have been scanned        Troubleshooting 251       Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action       Paper is not fed smoothly from  the Paper Feed Tray    Skipped paper  or multiple   sheet feeding           The angle of the Stripper Plate is  inappropriate        Turn the Stripper Plate Angle Adjustment  dial as follows     e When the feeding skips  Turn the dial to the left                    e When multiple sheets are fed  Turn the dial to the right                    Impo
36.  30  awaiting creation  Format  Ad    Note       In    Preview     all received original data is displayed as a master    A   i 3 i i a    Job  making image  Portions outside the print area do not actually   Process  Auto process    OFF    _     print      lt   Skip Page  1     Black B info j    Cancels a pending page  and starts processing the next page  Use this button when current file has extra   unwanted pages     Clear All    Deletes all jobs currently in the queue  Use this button to delete a job sent by a mistake  or pending jobs no  longer needed                            Print Basic Screen       Renew Page    You can recreate another master when the current one is damaged without having to receive original data from  the computer   Note   e If multiple pages exist  only the last page will be processed   e    Rotate    can also be specified      The confirmation screen for each respective button appears when touched  Touch  OK  to implement the  instructions   Important    e  Skip Pagel and  Clear All  are disabled during master making or printing processes   Press the key to modify directions while master making or printing is in progress    In master making process  the operation will stop after the master is made  In print process  the print job is halted    Note     e Pressing either the key or the key while waiting for a command  under Ready to Make Master Ready to  Print screens  will delete the pending job     Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB
37.  50 mm  2     Long edge of the print paper 297 mm  1111 16    A4 size    297 50 5  1111 1    2  5  with a remainder of 47 mm  111 46     In this example  5 images print on one sheet of paper        original 50mm  2   Printed paper 297mm  111  16         IT ATIATIATIATIA    p Paper output          direction  More than  5mm  3 16   Blank  Set the original and print paper  3 Select the Page Size   Place the original on the Glass Platen  Touch the Page Size same as the original and  touch  Next    Important   i l     In    Multi Up Tickets     the Page Size selection will  e Pay attention to the orientation of the original  not affect the rest of the procedures       Make sure to load paper as shown below        O Readv to Make Master  Page Size  Cancel Ji evs         Touch  Multi Up Print  on the Func   tions Screen                 e  Ready OM NELCMN ERGs Reproduction Size is set automatically and Multi   Selections Functions       Job Memory Multi Up Print      Up Print screen is displayed     Book Shadow J             78 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print     Functions for Master Making    4 Touch  Ticket   Important         If you have enlarged reduced size in step 8   setting print functions   be careful about the fol   lowing points            Specify the ticket width after enlarging reduc   ing        If you magnified the size  make sure that the  bigger size does not exceed the specified     Page Width    or the short edges of the print  paper
38.  A E E aS 25  Stop  TIMING piiespatihi hee ei 49  57  Storage Memory         ceeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeneeteees 193  Storing Environment               ceeceeeeeseeeceeeteeeneeeeeees 17  Storing Original Data 2 0    eee eeeeereeereeeeeeeeeees 186  Sub TOO BAN stenig on a a 172  T   TAD  ARCA  an teh ok Re ae a  31  32  Temperature Range           ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeereeteees 12  Text and Photo  Image Processing mode             58  Text  Image Processing mode     n    58  The Screens and their Various Stages                  26  Thermal Print Head 0 0    eeceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 217  Tips for Better Paper Feeding                     00e 17  TONG  GuIVG   ci tetees a a A AA eee 69  Tool Bar Position saranane NAA 172  TOP Marin terane RR 87  Troubleshooting   0 0    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 222    Index    U   Usage Status M ren ier heene he a 163  USB Flash Drive             13  115  117  121  160  173  USB Flash Drive Screen  0       cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 30  46  WSB Job  List  222 ntee cates a e teess 48  53  193  USB Slot i  Tenit a aS 21  53  User Counter sec Se 128  User identification access             cceeeeee 115  124  User Management                    ceeeeeeeerees 114  171  WSO Namet ara i cee es eer eee ie 122  User Registration Number  ID  o ae 120  User   s Usage            ce ccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeees 123  Ww   WAKE UP Key         cccceesceeseeeseeeeeeseesseeseeeseenes 25  53  Warning Messages           ceccceceeceeete
39.  A4 Letter and Under  Total number of A4 Letter sized and smaller copies that have been printed    Above A4 Letter  Total number of copies larger than A4 Letter that have been printed    Total  The total number of copies printed by the machine    A3 Ledger Master Count  Total number of A3 Ledger sized masters that have been made    A4W LetterW Master Count  Total number of A4W LetterW sized masters that have been made    Master Count  The total number of masters made by the machine    Print Drum  The total number of copies that have been printed with the currently installed Print Drum  Cylinder    Job Count  Start and stop as needed     For example  to keep a track of the number of prints made in a day  set    Job Count    to 0 in the morning  and check  the counter at the end of the work day to get the count   Note     e When using more than one Print Drum  Cylinder   install the Print Drum  Cylinder  for which you need information  before displaying the Counter Display screen     Touch  Meter Display  on the Func  2 Review counts   tions Screen     Meter Display  O Ready to Make Master Aailetier and Under    Selections W Functions  Meter Display A3 Ledger Master Count  4  ry A4W LetterW Master Count       Above A4 Letter       Auto Page Renewal Scannin e  ADF J Master Count Total    Job Separation Print Drum Meter A 0    Special Paper Ctrl             Job Count  4   4c        Note      Using the    Job Count       1  Touch to set the counter to 0     2  Touch  Close  to clo
40.  ADF unit      For Auto Document Feeder DX 1    Important        Take care not to touch the roller inside the  unit  It may cause smudges on the original  or a paper jam    Removing originals jammed in the    document feeder  Open the ADF Cover   Q    and pull out the    original                         Removing originals jammed in the  document carrier   Open the ADF Cover    4   and raise the feed     roller as shown          Open the inside cover       and pull out the  original                                  When a Message Displays 229    Troubleshooting       Area  Indicated   Blinking    Possible Cause    Action             The original is jammed in the optional ADF unit          For Auto Document Feeder DX 1    Removing originals jammed in the duplex  document carrier   Open the ADF Cover    4    and raise the  document tray as shown         Pull out the original                         Removing originals jammed in the original  receiving unit   Lift the Platen Cover Pad up        pull the  release lever toward you         and pull out the    original                         230 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting       Area Possible Cause Action  Indicated   Blinking       Paper is jammed in the Print Drum  Cylinder  1  Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder    area  p 211    2  Remove the jammed paper     3  Return the Print Drum  Cylinder  in place   4  Touch  OK      A Caution     The tips of the paper separation hook and   master removal hook are sharp  Whe
41.  Card in the Key Card Counter        224 When a Message Displays             Troubleshooting       Message    Possible Cause    Action          Job Separator is OFF     Turn On Power Switch of it    The Job Separator  option  is  turned OFF     Turn on the Job Separator        No IP Address Assigned to This  Printer  Contact Your Network Administrator    IP address for the machine is  not properly set     Contact your system administrator and set  the machine IP address correctly    p 169       No Paper Tape in Job Separator  Replace Tape Roll    No tape in the Job Separator   option      Load new tape into the Job Separator        Paper Tape Jam in Job Separator  Remove Paper Tape    Tape jam occurred in the Job  Separator  option      Check the Job Separator and remove  jammed tape         System Error    Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON  If Recovery has Failed  Call Service          A system error has occured        Shut off power  then restart   If recovery has failed  contact your dealer   or authorized service representative         C00 000 Consumable Errors  in alphabetical order        Message    Possible Cause    Action       Add Paper    No printing paper in the Paper  Feed Tray     Load paper into the Paper Feed Tray   p 34       Master Disposal Box is Full  Empty Master Disposal Box    The Master Disposal Box is full     Empty the Master Disposal Box   p 209       No Ink  Replace Ink Cartridge    The Ink is depleted     Replace and install a new Ink Cartridge   Use 
42.  Extremely hot and humid locations or extremely cold and dry locations    For more details  please read the packaging of the consumables     Ink Handling          Caution    If Ink gets into your eyes  flush it out immediately with plenty of water  If irritation continues  seek medical attention   If Ink comes into contact with your skin  wash it off thoroughly using soap    If someone swallows Ink by mistake  force large quantities of water  or milk  without inducing vomiting  and watch  his her condition    Allow plenty of ventilation during printing    If you feel unwell during use  seek medical advice    Only use the Ink for printing purposes    Keep the Ink out of the reach of children     Location of A Caution Label    This machine has a A caution label meant to ensure safe operation   Follow the indication of the label and use the machine safely                    Safety Guide   Handling and Operation 13    Before Starting to Use    Connection with a Computer    You can directly send original printing data from a connected computer to the machine  The machine produces out   standing prints as a result of using digital data to make a master                                                        Connection Method         One to one connection with a  Windows PC    USB port on the machine  e Cable  Z    USB cable  Less than 3m  10 feet  Hi Speed USB       Important    e Before connecting the USB  turn on the   USB port on  machine and computer  and wait until your compute
43.  Features      The processing order of the original and output  The original set in Auto Document Feeder DX 1 is scanned and printed from the top     Note   e In    Program  Multi Page Mode     the first page of the original scanned is displayed as    Page01    on the Setup  Screen     e g   With the    Back Side   gt  Simplex    option  the last page of the original is displayed as    Page01    on the Setup    Screen because scanning starts from the last  topmost  page     Front Side   gt  Simplex    Original Printed Copies    Back Side   gt  Simplex    Original       Duplex   gt  Simplex  Printed Copies    Original    Original       Selecting Scanning Sides When Using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Scanning Side  ADF  157    Advanced Features    Specifying the Scanning Side       1 Touch  Scanning Side  ADF  on the  Functions Screen     OCCU WRORVELCENEN CH  Select ions gf Funct ions       Special Paper Ctr  ID Counter Report      Scanning Side  ADF   Hig eed            2 Touch a scanning option button        Scanning Side  ADF Cancel _   _ OK   Front Side   gt  Simplex  Front Side   gt  Simplex      Jz   35    Back Side   gt  Simplex        Only front sides    Dupl   gt  Simpl  upsides  of    Duplex   gt  Simplex _  originals will be                                  scanned by the ADF             When you select  Duplex   gt   Simplex   Touch to select  Setting Direction  and  Pag   ing Direction  buttons  shown on the screen        Scanning Side  ADF     gt   7   gt   Bot
44.  Feed Tray and Paper Receiving Tray of the machine     Important      e Do not use unsuitable paper  or mix papers of different sizes   Doing so can cause paper jams and damage the machine    p 16    Setting up the Paper Feed Tray and Loading The Paper       1 Turn the power ON  3 Load paper     1  Place paper in the printing orientation    2  Slide the Feed Tray Paper Guides to fit to the  sides of the paper  Then turn the right and left  Feed Tray Paper Guide Levers to lock the  guides                                      cs   Unlock    gt     K    Lock             Pull the Paper Feed Tray to open it  until it comes Important     to a rest  e Make sure that the Feed Tray Paper Guides fit  tight up against the paper    Failure to do so can produce undesired results     Note     e Custom size paper must be registered on the  Admin  Screen before use    p 178  Failure to do so may create an incomplete mas   ter        34 Preparing to Print    4 Select the paper feed pressure                       NORMAL       For standard or thin paper       CARD   a    For thick or smooth surface paper    Note     e The setting condition of the paper feed pressure  is displayed at the top of the  Paper  button on  the Basic Screen     Check the Basic Screen     1  Select a mode    2  Touch  MasterMake  on the Operation  Selection Screen   The Master Making Basic Screen appears     ORECA ORVELA VERG  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast          Multi Up D Feed  Print Check      Note        The paper s
45.  Flash Drive is connected while the  Basic Screen for each mode is displayed  the USB Job List Screen is automatically displayed  See step 2     Touch  Storage Memory  on the  Functions Screen     OR EON ELCEVEN CH    Selections Functions    Top Margin J ADF Semi Auto  Max  Scan  Storage  Memory j    P  2 4 Ip                             The Storage Selection Screen or USB Job List  Screen  with    Non ID Print     is displayed    The    ID Print Job    button is displayed on the  screen      2 Select  ID Print Job  or  Non ID  Print      Note    e When    Management Level    is set to    Low   Admin tab only    in User Management   ID Print  Job  will not be displayed             When retrieving data set with    ID  Print Job     Touch  ID Print Job      Storage Selection  5  os      1_folder Free Area  98MB 90   P 1 1    NewsLetter doc Admn Nov22 XX                                              Fax cover doc RISO Nov22 XX    Newsletter doc RISO Nov22 XX    Images doc RISO Nov22 XX    ID Print Job      USB Job List           When retrieving data set with    Non   ID Print       When    Non ID Print    is displayed on the  screen  touch    Non ID Print           Storage Selection    1  a2  as   es les joe                                       1_folder Free Area  98MB 90   P 1 1     amp  Invoice No001 doc Admn Nov22 XX   amp  NewsLetter doc RISO Nov22 XX     amp  Report doc RISO Nov22 XX     Project doc RISO Nov22 XX           __Non ID Print J USB Job List         Retrieving St
46.  G Cps  Sets Ental J          CITY     CI                                                                      003    40 x i  o06    7o  x  fo  SaNi             Returns to the original screen  Ready to print       Readv to Make Master using the retrieved program       Program Type Note       To cancel the program printing  press  or  touch  Functions      gt   Program   and then  touch  Cancel Job  on the next screen  Cancel   ling program printing by pressing the E2 button  will reset other settings                             Program List J    a SR SE          3 Touch a button to select a Program  to retrieve     Program List    Select a Button to be Retrieved       Register      Program A Pattern A   P 09  Retrieve Proy  e   Program x   P 10                   Rename   Program C P 07  Clear Job 1 P 08    P 11  P 12                Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program  137    Advanced Features    Clearing Programs       1 Display the Program List Screen   Follow steps 1 2 in    Retrieving a Program       p 137      2 Touch  Clear      Program List       Select a Button to be Cleared    Program A at Pattern A Jt  Rename Program C J  Job 1                        Program List    Select a Button to be Cleared    Pr am A   Pattern A   o   Retrieve   fol Ta  Program X o    Rename   Program C 7_  1   es                           4 Touch  OK         Program List    0   el  Program A      R This Setting will be   l Cleared    G OK   Cancel  L ox                                    Re
47.  Job List  55    Basic Operations   When selecting  Skip Page  When selecting  Clear All    1 Touch  Skip Page   4  Touch  Clear All     ORECA VEL CRECI  Basic     Document_1 doc      OCETA ORVELA VERGI  Basic     Document_1 doc   P 1 2 Paper            Owner  RISO   Preview   iew  Owner RBO   Date amp Time  Nov25 XX 05 30 EZET  Date amp Time  Nov25 XX 05 30   Format  Ad   Format  A4 Skip Page i one    O   B pein A Clear All J    Job    z OFF           Jee    Process   Auto process ew    FAR  tenros A feep on  Process   Auto process  Ol J   Separation Separat ion    Black Gy lek             2 Touch  OK   2 Touch  OK      Master Making for Next Page le Job will be Cleared  will be Started    OK           OKE    E o_     Stops processing current page and moves on to Clears current job   process the next page     Starts processing next data in queue        56 Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List     Basic Operations    Changing Stop Timing       Stop timing as set on the printer driver takes priority by default   However  the settings can be changed on the machine while the machine is halted   Note     e If  Auto process  is set to    ON    in the Printing Property of the printer driver  press the key to stop the operation  and make the changes     1 Touch the    Process    function but  3 Touch  OK    ton  Returns to Basic Screen  Auto Print setting is  updated     O Ready to Make Master     Document_1 doc   P 1 4 Paper  32   Owner  RISO Preview   Dete amp
48.  Letter Statement  side on a single sheet of paper  2 Up printing   3 r  set the original on the Glass Platen  Ledger eid tere  Printing Legal 77  100   Touch  2 Up  on the Functions Paper Letter 66  100   Screen  Statement 50  66                       O Ready to Make Master  lt Multi Up gt        4 Press the key   Selections Functions    Job Memory J Multi Up Print    c   aa 9   ome         P  1 4    gt   Starts scanning the original                       Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print     Functions for Master Making    Operation for Multi Up Printing       1 Set the original and print paper     Important     e Pay attention to the orientation of the original   p 72   e Make sure to load paper as shown below  Por   trait direction           gt     Paper output    direction       Note     e It is convenient to place all originals in the  optional ADF unit when using the    Multiple   Original    mode   p 41    2 Touch  Multi Up Print  on the Func   tions Screen     ORR ORELO ERG  Selections    Job  Job Memory Multi Up Print    Functions    Book Shadow J    P  1 4    gt               Select the Page Size to use     Touch the Page Size same as the original and  touch  Next      O Readv to Make VENGI    Cancel    Page Size          Reproduction Size is set automatically and Multi   Up Print screen is displayed     Touch  Single  for Single Original   touch  Multiple  for Multiple Original        O Readv to Make Master    Multi Up Print           
49.  Paper Entry                   ceeeeeee 168  178  Custom Paper Size              ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 181  D   Data Information               cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 190  Data Map            cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeesaes 31  Default Folder aaa eenen e aeaaeae 168  Default Settings                ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeteeees 166  173  Density  Print Density    0 0 0    ce eeeeseeeeereeeeeeeeeeee 99  D Feed Check              ccccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteneeeeneeeeaes 103  Direct ACCESS         ccccccccceessseeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeseees 31  176  Direct Print             ccccceeeceeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeneees 48  DirectAccess Entry        ccecccesccescseceteceeetneeeeeeeneeeees 166  Disable E ince cat ie ete te dae sce et 124  Disabling User identification Access                 124  Display          ceecceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20  24  26  32  Display Adjustment             cceeeeeeeeseeeteeteeeeeeeeees 167  Display Priority ioraa a A 166  Displayed Language           c cccseeeeeseeteeteeeteeetees 167  Disposal of Depleted Consumables                     214  Document Storage Card    n se 256  Dot mi KOLO EE E E 67  Double Feed Check            2  cc cceeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeees 168  LB Uc eee aa a a 58  PUGALE a E ei E AS 58  DUO  PPOO  eieaa AA 58  Duo  Shadow Off  oeesianaeaa aea E Ae 58  E   ECO mode innar a e 170  Emaile fonn a 160  Energy Saving Mode    o s 170  Enlargement Reduction n se 63  Enlarging Reducing Originals
50.  Pressure Adjustment Lever to    CARD     i      p 35  p 36  Use flat printing paper that is free of folds  If curled paper is unavoidable  place the printing paper so that the curl  faces down    Paper may stick to the Print Drum  Cylinder  surface if the top margin is too narrow on the original or if the upper  portion of the original uses a large amount of Ink  To solve this problem  lower the print position to provide a wider  top margin or reverse the top and bottom of the original  Then restart printing from the beginning     Storing Environment       Store the printing paper in a level  dry area  Storing the paper in an excessively humid area can result in paper jams  or poor print quality    After unpacking the printing paper  keep the remaining paper wrapped and store it in a moisture proof box  It is highly  recommended to put silica gel in the paper storage box        Paper Recommendations 17    Before Starting to Use    Originals    Size and Weight Restrictions       Usable originals are as follows        Used Device Name    Size    Weight       Glass Platen    50 mm x 90 mm to 310 mm x 432 mm   131 32  x 317 35  to 127 32  x 17      Max  10 kg  22 Ib        Document Feeder AF   VI II  Option     100 mm x 148 mm to 310 mm x 432 mm   315 46  x 513 46  to 127 32  x 17      50 g m  to 128 g m2   13 Ib bond to 34 Ib bond        Document Feeder DX 1   Option           105 mm x 128 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm   41 8  x 51 32  to 1111 46  x 17         The weight differs depend
51.  Reset Counter Recognized by            120 Setting Up User Management  User Management     3 Touch an unused button     Create User       Select a Register Frame for a Button             Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line   Used buttons are grayed out and are not avail   able   Another user has been registered      Important      e Be sure to register the administrator first     e Ifthe administrator is not registered  buttons are  not available except    O Admin        e The    0    button is only available to the adminis   trator  Even if you rename this button  it will be  treated as the administrator     4 Input the PIN Code or connect the  USB Flash Drive       When    Recognized by    is set to       PIN Code       Input the PIN Code using the Print Quantity  Keys        Register    Input the PIN code     1 8 digits        Up to 8 digits can be input   Press the key to clear the PIN Code        Advanced Features      When    Recognized by    is set to     USB Flash Drive       Connect the registered USB Flash Drive to the  USB slot        Register    Rename J U 1    Insert the registered  USB flash drive  Group j 0FF   Limit   J OFF    Disable   OFF       The number that identifies the registered USB  Flash Drive is displayed     Note     e Ifyou register multiple USB Flash Drives  we  recommend that you ready them to be distin   guished later  for example  put a user name  on the USB Flash Drive      e If you input the assigned PIN Code     Recog   nized b
52.  Returns to the Functions Screen        Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory  143    Advanced Features    Retrieving a Job Memory and Printing       There are two ways to display the Job Memory Screen       Touch  Job Memory  on the Functions Screen on the display     e Press the key of the Print Quantity Keys     In the following steps  the explanation will be made for touching the display     Touch  Job Memory  on the Func   tions Screen     O Ready to Make Master       Selections Functions       Job Memory J Multi Up Print J  M   Book Shadow   oeu DD                      2 Touch  Retrieve      Job Memory    Select a Button to be Retrieved    Register   g M 1            T    Clear               Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line   Used buttons are grayed out and are not avail   able     144 Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory        3 Select a Job Memory to retrieve     Job Memory    Select a Button to be Retrieved    Register   g M 1     2 RISO NEWS                              A job setting can also be retrieved using the  Print Quantity Keys     M 1 to 9  to  9   M 10   0      4 Confirm the settings and touch  OK               Status Check Cancel J    RISO NEWS  Retrieve 1 4  MADE ees etsae Se aa  ee or en     03  Contrast ccaccescuees E erie E     04  Ink Saving ee  05  Size   100   Fe aie ae SOP ann  07  Paper Size   Auto  08  Max  Sean BOER ace acne   09  Book Shadow   OFF  Sa a TOEB y                Returns to the Functions Screen  Ready to print  us
53.  Size          Multi Up D Feed  Print Check         OReady to Make Master    E Auto    3 4 10    J ZA SPEED   gt  m py  SLOW 12345 FAST    E T  Q DENSITY  q m     UGHT 1 2 3 4 5 DARK    Paper                         1    Black                             MODE Key  7 p 26  p 30  p 166   Use to change modes    Display  7 p 26  p 32    Print Quantity Display    Displays the number of copies  or numeric values  entered for various settings     P Key  7 p 132    Use to retrieve stored programs  The indicator on the key  lights up when set    x Key  7 p 132    Use to move between the fields on Setup Screens  or set  up programed printing      Key  7 p 132    Use to move between the fields on Setup Screens  or set  up programed printing    C Key   Cancels the entered numerical values  or resets the  counter to 0    Print Quantity Keys  0 to 9 Keys    Use to enter the number of copies  or the numerical val   ues for various settings    X Key  p 129  p 140    Use to move between the items on a Setup Screen  or  retrieve the stored memory     11    9 8 7    65 12    10  Print Speed Adjustment Keys   Indicator   7 p 96   Select the print speed from five levels   The indicator above the keys shows the current speed  level     11  Print Density Adjustment Keys   Indicator   7 p 99   Select the print density from five levels   The indicator above the keys shows the current density  level     12  Print Position Adjustment Keys   Indicator    p 100   Adjust the print position in the horizon 
54.  Time  Nov25 XX 05 30  _Preview_J   Format  A4 Skip Page       Process  Pause before    Master    J Sat arati  n      Black MPause      The Process Screen appears              2 Select the desired function        Process  Auto process    ON             Pause before    Master          Pause before    Print     nal    OFF          Auto process    ON      Makes a master then  automatically prints     e  Pause before    Master      The operation stops  before making a master         Pause before    Print      After a master is made  and a proof copy is printed  the operation stops     e  Auto process    OFF      Stops before making a  master  and again stops before printing   Note     e See   p 50 for details regarding operations  after each stop                 Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List  57    Functions for Master Making    Selecting Image Processing Mode  Image     In order to make a master best suited for the original document  select an appropriate mode depending on whether    original contains only text  Line   photo  or both of them     Note     e Default Image Processing mode can be set on the Admin  Screen       p 167    Touch  Page  on the Master Making  Basic Screen     OCC UVROMIELCEVEN GH    Paper        Basic Selections Functions    Page  A4  Contrast Size    i o      D Feed  Print Check      18  Black                               2 Select the appropriate Image  Processing mode for the original           B A A a     d Q J ca a   imag
55.  When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     pi can also stop by pressing the        key or the  lt 2  key         Please inform this message  to your administrator  Due date for ID counter report     Symptom   Due date for ID Counter Report      Action   Report to your administrator    p 160    Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the       key or the    key to clear            l  Possible Multiple  Paper Feed     Check Printed Copies       Check printed copies        Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear      e For canceling    D Feed Check     Touch  D Check OFF  to change  from being highlighted  b w  to the  normal display           When a Message Displays 237    Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message       Printer Temperature is Low     High Speed    is Not  Available     Symptom   When the temperature of use is low  you  cannot use    High Speed         Action    Use the printer at the normal print speed  until the temperature inside the printer  increases to 15  C  59  F  or higher   When you touch    Continue     printing at  the normal speed starts    When you touch    Cancel     the Printing  Basic Screen appears       When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue     Alternatively  press the key to  print        When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or  the  3  key to clear         Processing Print Data  from PC   Scanning Mode is Not  Available whil
56.  a paper document or printing from a computer     Printing from a Paper Document    1     2     3     4        OReady to Make Master    Contrast    Page  A4             Black    Message Area   Displays operation guidance and the status of the  machine  Also displays program information and func   tion icons when printing using functions such as Pro   gram  ECO mode  and Ink Saving    Tab Area    Touch a tab to display its screen     Functions Area    Displays the main functions for master making printing  steps   Each button shows the current setting     Touch the relevant button to make the necessary  changes     Direct Access Area    Up to four buttons can be selected in advance  Use this  area to store most frequently used functions   You can make selections on the Admin  Screen        p 176                      P ramin W     Paper        Status Area  Displays the current status of the machine      Gs  Color of the currently installed Print Drum  Cylinder        Displays the status of data sent from a  computer   Touch to display the list of data being received                    Idle   Ready to receive data       Data Map   Processing data for printing       Pause   Ready for output        Error   Error in data transmission       Blocked   Cannot receive data      Touch to display    information  consum     ables information  Disposable Box Space  Print Drum   Cylinder  information  date time  My Counter     p 203       Display 31    Getting Acquainted       Printing from
57.  atte anean aaa eaa Qiadea diana fale a vee AA TAa ad daR 151  Using Auto Page Renewal           n nnnesnnesnneenrersssrrresrreerteerrtttttttrenrrnnnrannnsannsertterrrerrretnnernnena 152  Print the original from the last page  Output reversal                   ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 153  Proof and Print  only when the ADF unit is installed   ADF Semi Auto                      05 155  Selecting Scanning Sides When Using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Scanning side sA DF sci isco cote at a cat eta Pass WW tai ed a a a E aE 156  Specifying the Scanning Side                 ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeesneaeeeeeesseieaeeeeeetees 158  Checking User Counters  ID Counter Report                     ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 160  Outputting the Counter Report               ecccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeceaeeeeeesesceneeeeeeeseesneeeeeeeees 161  Setting Up the Monthly REMINder              ccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeecseeeeeseeeeseeeaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 162  Showing Usage Status  Meter Display                         seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163  Customizing the Direct Access Area  My Direct Access                    ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 164  Changing Default Settings  Admin           220 60   ccccecestceseseeeeeeeeeeseseeeseueebceuieeseeetteneeeeeeeeeeess 166  Configurable FUNCTIONS sea na a a e a a EN aaa a ae a E era 166  Customizing the Default Settings 2 0 0 0    ccccccccccccccccec
58.  cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesenees 84  Cc   C    ae ee eee eee 24  64  132  133  155  Changing Administrator User Registration          125  Changing Output Directions   0 0 0    eeeeeeeeeee 55  Changing the Data Order            eeeceeeereeereeeees 195  Changing the Owner Name    seeen 191  Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables 202  Cl SeleChite  E AE EE ca as 168  Cleaning sss eseeegseces a R R 216  Clear 2   e e ne 32  55  56  Clearing Programs              ccecceeceeereeeeeereeeeeeeeeeees 138  Clearing User Registration              ecceceeeeeeeees 126  Clock Calendar               2  cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeees 169    Closing the Auto control Stacking Tray                  40  Closing the Paper Feed Tray    o e 36  Closing the Paper Receiving Tray    seee 38  Color Drum  Cylinder             eeeceeceeereereeereeeeeeees 256  Computer Connection                  ceecceeeeeteeeeeeeees 14  Confidential  2 2     5 ter niet dees 147  Connection Method                  ccccceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 14  Consumable Error                ccceessseceeeeeeereeees 222  225  Consumables           ec eeeeccccceeessseeeeeeeeeessteeeeeess 13  202  Contrast  Adj ereo tate ie AER 68  Control Panel                cccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 24  Copying Stored Data 0    ee eeeeseeeteereeereeeeeeees 199  COUIMTOR sect ss hotest se  aed a EE 21  Create User ieia aa hel aides 116  171  Custom Paper            cc ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 178  Custom
59.  computer data    1     2     3        Read OM ELGCRNEM G       P 1 4    Preview J     Document_1 doc  Owner  RISO    Date amp Time  Nov30 XX 05 30    Format  A4    imin W    Paper            clear an        Process  Pause before    Master    os  OA Hain  7    E   idle J B Info J     Q  Black             Tab Area      Selections    and    Admin     tabs are disabled   Touch a tab to display its screen     Job Properties Area  Properties of the current print job are displayed   Refers to the computer data ready for print output     Job Operation Area        Preview   Displays the master making image of the  page currently awaiting creation   Available only in the  Master Making Basic Screen         Renew Page   Create another master when current  one is damaged or compromised  without having to  download data from the computer       Skip Page   Stops processing the current page and  moves on to process the next page        Clear All   Stops the current process altogether     Buttons on Touch Screen    Select buttons by lightly touching with a finger   Touch again to cancel the selection  Avoid pressing the buttons with excessive force        Eucat       Not Selected   Selected     Grayed out buttons cannot be  selected     Press the button with a   on the  right side to expand the options or  display Setup Screens     32 Display    4   5     6     7     Paper Button   Process   A printing operation can be set to stop at certain points    overrides driver settings    Optional D
60.  copy  to check the new position    p 100          Are the Paper Guides set properly        Make sure to align the Paper Guides with  the paper  and turn the Paper Guide Lock  Levers until they are secured  See     Preparing to Print     p 34         Troubleshooting 247       248    Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action       Paper sticks to the surface of  the Print Drum  Cylinder      The margin at the top of the original or  print is too small     The margin of the original  top of the print  in the paper output direction  must be  5mm  3 1     at least  Lower the vertical  print position  If this adjustment is  impossible  reproduce an original with  enough margin and perform the master   making operation again    p 61       The print paper is inappropriate     Use the recommended paper   p 16       The original has a solid black portion  at its top     If an original has a solid black portion at  the top  printed copies may not be with  proper quality  Replace the original in the  reverse direction and restart the master   making process        output     Printed and curled copies are    The print paper is loaded at a  horizontal grain direction     Load print paper with a vertical grain  direction         option         Paper gets jammed in the Auto  Document Feeder AF VI II       There is any paper caught in the Auto  Document Feeder AF VI II     Pull the ADF Original Release Lever to the  right or turn the Release Original Dial and  remove the jamm
61.  data is received  touch on the  Basic Screen to review current Job List  From the  Job List Screen  you can initiate output for jobs  pausing for output  or cancel jobs that are     Paused Data Mapping Waiting                             Tip    ID Print   The data sent from the printer driver as the    ID  Print    is retrieved from the ID Print Job Screen and  printed    Touch  ID Print Job  to display the Recognition  Screen  and follow the message on the screen   The timing of the Recognition Screen differs  depending on the    User Management    settings  done by the administrator     p 171    ID Print Job     Pause  Owner Cps  Page        Waiting Job s      5 Document_4 doc       Document_5 doc    File name only       Note     e To set the    ID Print    in the printer driver  a user  registration number  ID  is required  one or two  digits     Contact your administrator for the PIN Code or  registered USB Flash Drive  and the user regis   tration number  ID         52 Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List     Printing USB Data  USB Job List     Basic Operations       Even if the computer and machine are not connected by cable  you can print original data via a USB Flash Drive   It is useful when the computer and printer are placed in different places or printing with SE 9 Series in outside loca     tion     Note     e When    User Management    is set by the administrator  the users will be asked to identify themselves during oper     ations  For d
62.  driver with    Auto Print       ON           Retrieving Stored Data   USB Flash Drive data       When selecting data to be  printed on the  Storage    Immediately after  touching  Preview     When you touch  Retrieve    the data is retrieved and the                      and printing Selection  Screen  set on Master Making Basic Screen  the  Storage Retrieve  for saved data is displayed   Screen   When touching  Retrieve  Immediately after Displays immediately when  on the  Storage Retrieve  touching  Preview  you touch  Preview  on the  Screen  USB Job List  retrieved screen  When you  Screen and retrieving saved touch  Close   you will return  data  set on the Master to the Master Making Basic  Making Basic Screen for Screen for saved data   saved data    Note     e It shows the scanned original as is  A margin is required when actually printing  Check to make sure that the mar   gins are sufficient  Also  the actual print is confined to the maximum printing range of the Print Drum  Cylinder   so  the image may be cut off  p 19    e In    Direct Print    operation   Preview  will be displayed on the Master Making Basic Screen when data is received    from the computer   p 55    92 Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master  Preview     Functions for Master Making    Actions Available on the Preview Screen             Preview    Cancel Continue         Wid SV OL    V In6zZ   WSL Jaquiaidas                      1 2 34 6  1  Rotate Image Button 4  Reduce Button  Allows yo
63.  following options     Paper Feed Adj   Adjust Paper Feed Tray position and paper feed amount to suit special paper characteristics   For adjustment methods  please contact your dealer  or authorized service representative      Paper Eject Adj   Some types of original image paper may be printed with an uneven or blurred finish due to air blow or separation  fan settings  This option can be used to change air blow and separation fan settings    For adjustment methods  please contact your dealer  or authorized service representative        Receive Tray  when using the optional Auto control Stacking Tray     The positions of the Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper on the Auto control Stacking Tray are automatically  adjusted according to the paper size  Detailed adjustments to these positions can also be made using the display  buttons where appropriate    For information on adjusting the Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper  see    Adjusting the Auto control Stacking  Tray      p 112      Important      e In cases where the Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper are not raised  adjustments cannot be made to the  Auto control Stacking Tray     Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl  105    Functions for Printing    Setting the Jump Wing Control  Jump Wing Control        Touch  Jump Wing Control  on the Func   tions Screen     OCU NECRVELGCEUENCH  Select ions    Funct ions f Admin  N             Jump Wing Control    is 
64.  idling  go  to the Admin  Screen    p 171   Idling can also be manually initiated when making  a master    p 149    Tip    Operations on the Recognition Screen   When    User Management    is set by the adminis   trator  the users will be asked to identify them   selves     User identification access     if he she is  registered or not  during operations    The user identification procedures will differ  according to the Recognition and Identification  System decided by the administrator     Note        A PIN Code and USB Flash Drive are used in  the Recognition and Identification System   Contact your administrator for the PIN Code  and the USB Flash Drive you have to use     When the PIN Code Input Screen is displayed  Enter the PIN Code using the Print Quantity Keys  and touch  OK     The initial screen will be displayed after the user  has been identified     46 Printing from a Paper Document or Book       Note   e Ifan incorrect PIN Code is entered  an error    message will be displayed  Re enter the correct  PIN Code     Input the PIN code    When registered USB Flash Drive Screen is  displayed   Connect the registered USB Flash Drive to the  USB slot     Insert the registered  USB flash drive                      The initial screen will be displayed after the user  has been identified     Basic Operations    Note     e Ifan unregistered or unusable USB Flash Drive  is connected to the machine  an error message  will be displayed  Connect a registered USB  Flash Drive 
65.  in this manual     About the notation  The following icons are used throughout the document     AWARNING   A caution     Important      Note   Tip   S         Von             Ignoring this warning could cause death or serious injury   Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property     Indicates items that require special attention or that are prohibited actions   Read carefully and follow the directions as instructed     Gives you useful information   Gives you additional hints for more convenience     Indicates a reference page     Indicates a button or an item name on the LCD display     Indicates which button to touch on the LCD display     Indicates the original document     Indicates printed copies     Icons Used in This Manual       The notation for Operational Instructions and Function Descriptions  The following conventions are used to explain functions and operations                 Functions for Master Making       Functions for Master Makin 3 ees    Retums to the Master Making Basic Screen   Image Processing mode is updated     Note                                                              Some functions are not available in certain  Selecting Image Processing Mode  Imag Image Processing mode settings   In order to make a master best sulted for the original document  select an appropriate mode depending Tne  Photo   Duo  Penal  original contain only text  Line   photo  or both of them   Daros    v lv     Note  Contrast  Auto    y                
66.  material Soy oil  petroleum hydrocarbons  water  pigments             Note   e Itis made of carbon and hydrogen compounds  If fully combusted  it will turn into water and carbon dioxide     Disposal of Depleted Consumables 215    Maintenance    Cleaning    The print quality may suffer if parts such as Thermal Print Head of the Master Making Unit  Scanner Glass of the  optional ADF unit  White Sheet  etc  are contaminated with dust  dirt  Ink  white out  etc    Follow the steps below for periodic cleaning     AWARNING     Before cleaning any part of the machine  turn off the power   Do not remove any fixed covers     Contact your service representative immediately if you suspect any dangerous situations or have questions or  problems with the machine     Contact your service representative before moving the machine   Do not allow unauthorized persons to make adjustments or repairs     A Caution     The machine has precision moving parts inside  Do not handle the machine in any other way than described in this  manual     Be careful of the edge of metal parts  otherwise it may cause an injury   Do not make any modifications to the machine or remove any parts     Neither Riso nor its dealer  or authorized service representative  is responsible for maintenance service performed  by non Riso authorized personnel     216 Cleaning    Maintenance    Thermal Print Head       Clean the Thermal Print Head each time you replace the Master Roll   Open the Master Making Unit Cover  and ge
67.  multi feed detection message is occasionally displayed  even though no multi feed has occurred  e When using dark paper  black  red  dark blue   e When using paper already printed on the back side    Note   e In the factory settings     D Feed Check    is set to    ON      p 168    Touch  D Feed Check  on the Functions  Screen     ORENA ORECA VERG    Functions    Editor J Ink Saving    Idli tion J  Ca   P  3 4    The button changes from being highlighted  b w  to the  normal display  and    D Feed Check    is set to    OFF                             Prevent Paper Jams When Using Special Paper  D Feed Check  103    Functions for Printing    Extending the drying time  Interval     A sheet of paper is normally fed and printed with each Print Drum  Cylinder  rotation  but by extending the paper feed  interval  the Ink has more time to dry  which prevents Ink marks on the back of the next sheet   The paper feed interval  skip rotation  can be set from 1   10        Touch  Interval  on the Functions Note   Screen  e Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter  numbers   e If you are using extended paper and set the  O Ready OM VEL MERIC Print Drum  Cylinder  skip rotation to an odd        number  the actual skip rotation is the    Set  Functions Nae ae       a  D Feed Check Interval  SS Lo  4 Touch  0K     _Ren je  Returns to the Functions Screen     Interval    setting                2 Touch  ON      Select Print Quantity  f interval  caei J    J          OFF Skip Rotation    
68.  one to be scanned first is on the top  Afterwards  align the ADF Original Guides with the  page width and set originals fully to the rear of the ADF        Important     If the original is smaller than the paper size that can be set in the ADF unit  place the original on the Glass Platen   Do not place multiple originals of differing sizes or otherwise unsuitable originals into the ADF unit    It might cause paper jams and damage the machine    p 18   Once the originals are placed into the ADF unit     Auto Process    setting is turned ON  Press the key to turn  it OFF  Default    Auto Process    setting for the ADF unit can be changed on the Admin  Screen    p 167  p 168    Note        Up to 50 sheets of 80 g m   21 Ib bond  paper can be placed in the ADF unit     e To print a proof copy after each master making process  select  ADF Semi Auto     p 155    Placing the original 41    Basic Operations    When using the ADF AF VI II   Tip    Setting Direction  direction of text on the original   The original setting direction is decided by the number  of pages set when using    Multi Up Print    and    Layout     functions    Set the original according to the direction of text on the  original seen from the touch panel side                                Align Top  Set the original face down  or p   qm    e L a EEEE  Important       e The placeable original size of 100 mm x 148 mm  315    x 513 46   and above   fees Seale above Align Side  When using the ADF DX 1  or a   1 saab
69.  original  see p 41     Important      e Be careful with the orientation of the original        Make sure to set the printing paper in the orien   tation shown in the figure below  the long side  points in the direction of transfer           gt     Paper output direction          2 Touch  Layout  on the Functions  Screen     OReady to Make Master  Select ions  Funct ions          Select the page size to use     Touch the button corresponding to the size of the  original and touch  Next gt       Page Size   _Cancel_J                The reproduction size is automatically set and the  Layout Screen is displayed     Touch the button for the number of  images to set     Touch the button for the number of images to be  laid out and touch  Next gt          Set the Ist or ial  in direction shown  in the right figure       Important      e Check if the orientation of the originals has  been set in the direction determined for the set  number of images     Note   e To cancel the Layout setting  touch  Cancel      Set the orientation of characters of  the original     Select  Align Top  or  Align Side  for the orienta   tion of characters on the original seen from the  touch panel side     Original orientation    Align Top Align Side    Layout order    Touch the layout order button to set     Touch  OK         Layout    is set and the Functions Screen appears     82 Laying out continuous originals on one sheet of paper  Layout     Functions for Master Making    8 Configure print functio
70.  printing paper first     p 16      Maximum printing area    SE9480  291 mm x 425 mm  1115 30  x 1623 32    SE9380  291 mm x 413 mm  1115 32  x 161 4      Important    e The 5 mm     1     margin on the top cannot be scanned even in the    Max  Scan    setting   e Do not use print paper smaller than the area of the image made on the master        The entire surface of the Glass Platen must be clean  This may cause Ink stains   By scanning the maximum size  dirt found outside the original document area will also be included in the master   This may cause the internal roller to be stained with Ink     Touch  Max  Scan  on the Functions  Screen     O Ready to Make Master    Functions  Top Margin   ADF Semi Auto  Binding Margin J Preview  n    Reg ion Storage Memory j     Max  Scan  is selected                               90 Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum Printing Area  Max  Scan     Functions for Master Making    Rotating the Original 180 Degrees to Make a  Master  Rotate     When you are direct printing  you can rotate the original data received from a computer 180 degrees to make a mas   ter  When this function is used for the original data of a wide range of solid colors on the top side  you can prevent    paper jams     After the machine receives the original  data  touch  Rotate  on the Functions  Screen     ORT MCOM ELCE ERICH       Selections WJ Functions    Special Paper Ctrl         Rotate    setting is updated     Note    e When you send the original data 
71.  screen  See step 2 in    Customiz   ing Default Settings       p 173        3 Touch  Protect         All    User Management    Protect   OFF       Display    Default    rel re   12hour  Auto Page Renewal     OFF  Minimum Print a   ty    OFF       System       Editor       EEL             Protect    is turned ON     Note    e When    Protect    is set to    ON        Energy Saving  Mode     Auto Sleep or Auto Power OFF  is auto   matically set to ON and the waiting time is set to  one minute   The set time cannot be changed     e If    Protect    is ON   Renew Page  is grayed out  and not available     Keeping Masters Secure After Printing  Protect  183    Advanced Features    If    Protect    is ON    The following screen is displayed after printing     F95 008     Protect       Discard Current Master          Cent J     Touch  OK  or  Cancel      OK   Discards the master remaining on the Print Drum   Cylinder      Cancel   Choose this when you do not wish to discard  the master or wish to print further copies     Note     e The       Protect    Discard Current Master    message is  also displayed when printing from computer data on  a PC     If you select  Cancel  while the    Protect    setting is  active  the       Protect    Discard Current Master    mes   sage is on appears each time you press key or  key     The screen shows the message below when         setting the Print Drum  Cylinder  that has been  removed without the    Confidential    operation  or        the ma
72.  see  p 211     Kom A                      A Caution   e Be sure to turn OFF power to the machine when cleaning the Pressure Roller     e When you insert a hand inside the machine  be careful not to touch the paper separation hook or master removal  hook  The tips of the paper separation hook and master removal hook are sharp  so they may cause injury       Ink may be left on the area near the Print Drum  Cylinder   so take care not to smudge your hands or clothes  Wash  immediately with soap if you should get Ink on your hands  etc     Master Removal Hook                   Separation Hook    Cleaning 219    Maintenance    The Exterior       Use a soft cloth to gently wipe down the entire printer on a regular basis in order to prevent the exterior from getting  dirty   If using a cleaning agent  use one recommended by your authorized service representative                                                     Important    e Because the machine exterior is plastic  never use alcohol or solvent when cleaning     e The Display may be cleaned by gently wiping with a dry cloth  Dampen a cloth with a small amount of cleaner and  gently wipe to remove any Ink   Do not spray or pour cleaner solution directly onto the display  Doing so can cause damage     220 Cleaning    Maintenance    Cleaning 221    Troubleshooting    When a Message Displays  Refer to the following information to determine the cause and take appropriate actions when the machine stops oper     ating and a message is d
73.  selected    e When the page size  original size  is not  detected            is displayed        Page  Ad Recommend  122     Paper  B4 Current  122  tarot    O  Rye     100    61  A3   B5       auto e  71  BABI     imo pe ORS  82  B4   A4     163  B5   A3       ity Black mae          2 Touch the button corresponding to Free J  _s7 6 EF  the desired size  Zoon    16  BSAS          Cancel J Ok    Page  A4 Recommend  122   arsine   3  Paper  B4 Current  122     100    61  A3    gt B5   NAB  ato    71  RIOR   Oa   16396 A3  Free   07  AS ORE  zoom    18  BASAS    Touch  OK      Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen      Size    is updated                 Touch  100   to restore the original size   For original with no margins  touch  Margin    before printing     Important      e The    Margint    setting is not available when     Auto        Zoom    or    Free    is selected        62 Enlarging Reducing Originals  Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto   Free   Zoom     Functions for Master Making    Enlargement Reduction of a Changed Aspect Ration  Free        1 Touch  Size  on the Master Making Note   Basic Screen  e Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter  numbers   e Press the key to restore the original size  OReady to Make Master  100     Basic  Page  A4  Contrast Size Paper      4 Touch  OK          Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen      Size    is updated        Auto 10  TEE    0   Multi Up D Feed i  Print Check    ace    2 Touch  Free                        
74.  set to    High Full Management     touch  My  Counter  to display    My Counter    Screen                                      2 Check for remaining amount of con  On the    My Counter    Screen  you can confirm the  sumables  current user   s Limit C C  M C and Present C C  M C   Limit C C and M C are set by the administrator  Con   B info  cose _  sult your administrator for details   EE  E  Standart O My Counter    U 1 G 1              Limit C C 10  000    Disposal Box Space Date and Time Present C C 6 511    1 Disposal LOMA Nov23 XX    11 25 My Counter J  Drum Information     0  A3 Black    Limit M C 10  000  Present M C 250       When running low  be sure to restock supply   e Master     p 204    e Ink   p 207    e Master Disposal  used master        p 209              202 Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables    Tip      Information Button   B icon on the   Information Button displays cur   rent status of the consumables as detected by the  machine    The    icon will change depending on the match   ing information detected from the consumable     e When matching information was correctly  retrieved from the consumable  normal dis   play    e When matching information is not available  A  gray display    When the   icon is grayed  the remaining   amount of master Ink cannot be displayed     When the master material or Ink runs low        master  or link  icon blinks on the right of  the button to let you know that the item should  soon be replaced     Note    e If 
75.  the    Consumables Information Input Wizard    Screen  disappears and thus you need to enter the values again       After the power switch is set to O  OFF  and the switch is set to    ON  again      After the machine is placed into the Sleep status       After the key is pressed    Ink Information Input Screen  This screen pops up when data could not be obtained from the Ink Cartridge     OREM COM ELCEERNCH      ink    Cannot Get Consumables Info  Input Values Required          Touch  OK  and enter values as shown below           Screen Display Description Values   H1  Ink Color Setting 1  Black 2  Color  Select the same color as the Print Drum    Consumables Information Input Wizard    Ink Information Input  Cylinder  currently in use         H1  Ink Colour Setting                      When a Message Displays 241    Troubleshooting       Screen Display Description    Values        H2  Print Density Fine Adjustment    Consumables Information Input Wizard       Ink Information Input fine tune print result    H2  Print Density Fine Adjustment  CJ       Select a Print Density level to match the Ink to    1  Light    5  Dark         H3  First Print Density Adjustment    Consumables Information Input Wizard    Ink Information Input match the Ink        EE  Density Fine Adjustment setting              Select a Print Density level of the first print to    LUAN Firat Ene anst Adatriant This can be selected independent of  H2  Print       1  Light    5  Dark        A confirmation sc
76.  the    Remaining Qty to  be notified     a message will appear on the display     Note   e To switch an entry  directly touch the button or press    the key        Purchase Qty   0 99 Pcs    Remaining Qty to be notified  0 99 Pcs           Changing Default Settings  Admin   171    Advanced Features       Display Access Functions Description  Button       Beep Sound OFF Limited ON  Select whether to activate a beep sound when a key  a  button is pressed  or when an error occurs   e ON  Beeps when any key button is pressed  Beeps when   System  an event occurs is completed   e Limited  Does not beep when keys buttons are pressed   Does not beep when restarting the machine   e OFF  Does not beep        Print Colors   See RISO Editor User s Guide  for details        Tool Bar Position   Editor        Sub Tool Bar       Page Orientation                   172 Changing Default Settings  Admin      Customizing Default Settings    Advanced Features       The default settings can be changed when the machine is not in operation     Make sure there is no pending or current Print Job operation     Note     If the administrator is registered in User Management  only the administrator can change the  Admin   settings      This operation requires input of the administrator s PIN Code or connection of the registered USB Flash Drive       p 120    1 Touch  Admin   on the Basic Screen  for each mode     OCU NECRELCRUENICH    Page  A4  Contrast Size    100        2 Touch  OK      OCCU VECRIELCRE
77.  the  same settings              OReady to scan data    Page No 1  File Name scan_0001 Owner 7 Touch    Directory 1_folder    Owner 1_  Once the original to be saved as one set of data is    scanned  touch  CH   A confirmation screen appears              Basic       Page  A4  Contrast Size Format    E Aut 3  ES comme   19     B4 8 Touch  Yes      The data is saved     When you touch   lt Back   the screen returns to    the previous operation   When you touch  No   the scanned contents are  canceled     Note   e Press the key to exit scan mode           3 Setting data information     Sets the data name  save location and owner  name    p 190    4 Setting required functions     Set the required functions for scanning the origi   nal        Converting Hard copies to Stored Data  Scan Mode  189    Storing Original Data and Use Method    Setting Data Information       Settings for the data to be scanned and stored are configured on the Scan Basic Screen   The file name  directory and owner name are automatically allocated when scan mode is started  but you can change    this preset information if needed     Note     e Default settings for the    Directory    folder can be changed in    Admin           p 168     1 Enter a file name     1  Touch the file name input box     OReady to scan data  Page No 1  alate scan_0001 EE Owner  Nee older        Basic I Admin  N             Page A4    es fa    Line    j Book  n  Preview Shadow      The Rename screen appears              2  Touch th
78.  the Master Making Unit to its original posi   tion and close the Front Cover     206 Replacing the Master Roll       Replacing Consumables    Replacing the Ink Cartridge    When the Ink is depleted  a message is displayed and the machine stops   Replace with a new Ink Cartridge     A Caution    e Ink may be left on the area around the Print Drum  Cylinder   so take care not to smudge your hands or clothes   e Wash immediately with soap if you should get Ink on your hands  etc    Important     e For the Ink Cartridge  it is recommended to use the products specified by RISO    e Keep the power ON while replacing the Ink Cartridge     e Replace with an Ink Cartridge of the same Ink color  If you want to change the Ink color  replace the Print Drum   Cylinder  itself   p 211    1 Open the Front Cover  3 Remove the cap on the new Ink Car   tridge     Turn the Ink Cartridge cap to remove                                   2 Pull the empty Ink Cartridge out of  the holder  Important      e Do not touch or give impact to the outlet surface  of the new Ink Cartridge     i Do not peel off the label beside the Ink Car     tridge opening   Unlock       Df we                            Turn the Ink Cartridge to the counter clockwise   D  and then pull it out                 Important      e For collection or disposal of used Ink Car   tridges  refer to the following page   p 214       Replacing the Ink Cartridge 207    Replacing Consumables    Note     e You can store the Ink Cartridge ca
79.  the Specifications at the end  of this manual    Do not overload the electrical outlet or extension cord  nor damage the power cord by placing heavy objects on it  or pulling or bending it  This can result in fire or electric shock    Do not pull the power cord but hold the plug itself when unplugging it  This can damage the cord and result in fire  or electric shock    Do not plug or unplug the power cord if your hands are wet  This can result in electric shock     10 Safety Guide   Installation    Before Starting to Use    A Caution     e Pull out the power cord plug from the electrical outlet more than once a year and clean the prongs of the plug and  their surroundings  Dust collected on these areas can result in fire     Important      e Check the power cord and plug for poor connections  Plug the power cord securely into a nearby electrical outlet   e Be sure to turn off the POWER switch when connecting or disconnecting a cable     Grounding       A Caution   e Ensure a power plug with a ground conductor is inserted into the wall outlet for proper grounding   e When the machine is not grounded  a short circuit may occur  resulting in fire or electric shock     Safety Guide   Installation 11    Before Starting to Use    Safety Guide   Handling and Operation    This section describes the precautions to be observed when handling the machine  Read this section before operat   ing the machine     Operation Environment       Important      e Operate the machine under the fol
80.  the printing area is decided by the paper size set in the Paper Feed Tray  The  printing area is the printing paper size excluding the margins shown in the figure below  The original needs to be  prepared with advanced consideration for the margins     5mm   16   2 mm  3 32             Top  Side                         Materials Not to Be Printed    Do not use the machine in any manner which violates the laws or infringes on established copyrights  even when  making copies for personal use  Consult your local authorities for further details  In general  use discretion and com   mon sense        Originals 19    Getting Acquainted    Function and Name of Each Part    1     2     3     4     5        Master Disposal Box   p 209    Holds discarded masters    Feed Tray Ascent   Descent Button  7 p 36   Lowers the Paper Feed Tray when changing or adding  paper    Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever    p 35    Adjusts the paper feed pressure according to the paper  in use    Paper Feed Tray     p 34    Load print paper on this tray    Feed Tray Paper Guides   p 34     Hold and guide paper   Slide to fit to the sides of paper     20 Function and Name of Each Part          6     7   8     9        Platen Cover   Opened and closed when placing the original   Platen Cover Pad     p 217    Glass Platen    p 41    p 217    Place the original face down     Control Panel  p 24   p 25   Press the keys to perform various print operations     10  Display  7 p 26     Displays various screens 
81. 0  Optional  DEVICES ik Aea aa a a a a A aeaniee aeaee aiat 23  Control PANTS hs esere reee wa ass a eee tt a e secs 24  Display os css eects tae cadet eshte dd etl aot ciate sd Ath alee te a dol She Nar hd eth leah a dito 26  The Screens and their Various StagQes              cccccccccececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeecenneeeeeeeesesneeaeeeeseeseeeeeeess 26  About Modes neiaie find nective JAW ote ied ain deve i aak 28  Basic    Screen Layout intsen irena oti baa aces varanasi VEEL cede neat eek dd aden andres 31  Basic PIOCess sn inean a ae iaisi a a a E E meres 33  Printing from a Paper Document              cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeceeaaeeeeeeseceaeeeeeesteneaees 33    Printing from a Computer Data                ccccceccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeseecaeeeeeesesieaseeeeessenaaees 33    Contents          Basic Operations 34  Preparing GO  Printeren ee tees see rs See ec ene ate a ee ee 34  Setting up the Paper Feed Tray and Loading Paper      0           ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeeeeeeeeenaees 34  Setting up the Paper Receiving Tray              ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeeesesieeeeeeeeeeeas 37  Setting up the Auto control Stacking Tray  Optional                   cecccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeteaeeeeeeeeees 39  PIACING TG OniQINAl 222 scccacu020 2 sece cencedozendtesesedtee se Eege aie aoc Feut cderuse seve ane vege dvgudsbecedLestcenecesere  41  When placing on the Glass Platen                cccccceeceecececeeeeeeneeeceeeeeceeeeeeeseeecneeeeses
82. 0 0  to 131 32   on the top  bottom  left and right     Important     e    Binding margin    is a function for adjusting the master making position and not a function for adding a binding mar   gin    When the original has no margin  the image may extend out of the area for master making  The part that is outside  the master making area is not used for master making    The position of the binding margin is the side that appears first when printed copies are discharged to the Paper  Receiving Tray    The binding margin can be set to either the Top  Bottom  Right  and Left of printed copies     When auto reproduction is set  move the image to where it should appear after the magnification has been  adjusted     This function is available with    Auto 90  Rotation    and Rotate        Note     When the Print Position Adjustment on the control panel is used in combination with the binding margin  the Output  Print Position can be moved up to approx  65 mm  2 9 46   vertically and 60 mm  2 23 64   horizontally with respect  to the position of the original image     This function cannot be used with the following functions       Multi Up Print       2 Up       Overlay       Scanning Side  ADF       Layout    Touch  Binding Margin  on the Func  2 Touch  Top    Bottom    Left    tions Screen   Right  for the desired adjustment     Binding margin           O Ready to Make Master        Selections         Functions          Top Margin J ADF Semi Auto             To  Botton   aa  er    
83. 13 Ib bond   Using the optional Auto Document Feeder DX 1   less than 40 g m   11 lb bond   Front Side   gt  Simplex    less than 52 g m   14 Ib bond   Duplex   gt  Simplex         Extremely thick originals  Using the optional Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  greater than 128 g m2  34 Ib bond   Using the optional Auto Document Feeder DX 1   greater than 128 g m   34 Ib bond   Front Side   gt  Simplex    greater than 105 g m   28 lb bond   Duplex   gt  Sim     plex         Heavy drawing paper        Originals with staples or clips    e If an original is wrinkled  curled  or creased flatten it thoroughly so that the originals can be pressed directly onto  the Glass Platen during processing     18 Originals       Before Starting to Use    e If correction fluid or glue is used on an original  thoroughly dry it before placement   e Ifan original is patched with a thick paper  the shade of the patched paper may also be printed     Maximum Printing Areas and Margins       The maximum printing areas are as follows                             Model Maximum Printing Area Usable Maximum Print Paper Size  SE9480 291 mm x 425 mm  1115 32  x 1623 30    320 mm x 432 mm  1219 32  x 17    SE9380 291 mm x 413 mm  1115 32  x 161 4    Important      e Even when paper of maximum size  320 mm x 432 mm  1219 32  x 17    or Ext Paper  top bottom length up to 555  mm  2127 32    is used  printing is performed within the maximum printing areas mentioned above      Regardless of the size of the original 
84. 2 proof copies will be made  When the print position has  been adjusted  the printer will center the Print Drum  Cylinder  to their original position  recreate the master and  print a proof copy  Then  the Print Drum  Cylinder  will move to the previously adjusted position and print another  proof copy    e The number of pages in the proof copy when using    Auto Page Renewal    can be adjusted using    Admin      p 171   e When the print position has been adjusted  2 proof copies will be made   When the print position has not been  adjusted and when the print position has been adjusted     150 Reproducing the Master  Renew Page  Auto Page Renewal     Advanced Features    Using Page Renewal       1 Touch  Renew Page  on the Func   tions Screen     Select Print Quantity    Selections Functions    Idling Action    Renew Page          Confidential 4 Auto Pay    Note    e If you touch and select  Rotate   you can rotate  the original 180 degrees for renewing the mas   ter    e When    Rotate    is set  the machine rotates the  original 180 degrees for renewing the master  while executing    Auto Page Renewal       e To cancel    Rotate     touch  Rotate  again     newal  ie             Select Print Quantity    Renew Page Cancel _J __OK          Master Renewal Mode          Renew Page    begins reproducing the master        Reproducing the Master  Renew Page  Auto Page Renewal  151    Advanced Features    Using Auto Page Renewal       In order to use    Auto Page Renewal     you m
85. 513 46     320 mm x 432 mm  1219 39  x 17      Paper up to 555 mm  21 27 32   from top to bottom may be used in the  Extended Paper mode     Approx  1000 sheets  64 g m   17 lb bond    80 g m   21 lb bond      Maximum Height 110 mm  4 11 39      Approx  1000 sheets  64 g m   17 lb bond    80 g m   21 Ib bond      Maximum Height 110 mm  4 11 39      46 g m   12 Ib bond    210 g m2  110 Ib index     Line  Photo  Standard Portrait Group   Duo  Line Photo Shadow off    Pencil  Darker Lighter     Approx  20 seconds  for A4 short edge feed 100  reproduction ratio   Approx  16 seconds  for A4 long edge feed 100  reproduction ratio     291 mm x 413 mm  1115 32  x 161 4      Zoom  50   200    Standard reproduction ratio  enlargement   163   141   122   116   Standard reproduction ratio  reduction   87   82   71   61   Margint   90   99      60   130 sheets per minute  control panel  five steps variable   180   185 sheets per minute  Touch panel  High Speed      Vertical    15 mm   19 32   Horizontal   10 mm    25   4    Fully automatic  1000 ml per cartridge    Fully automatic  approx  220 sheets per roll    100 sheets   LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators    Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Color Print  Drum  Cylinder   Auto Control Stacking Tray  Wide Stacking Tray  Key Card  Counter  Job Separator  Document Storage Card DM 128CF DM 512CF   RISO Controller IS300  Stand D type  Stand N type  Card Feed Kit  Envelope  Feed Kit  RISO Printer Driver fo
86. 8  Laying out continuous originals on one sheet of paper  Layout                     ccseseeeeeeeeeeeees 80  Printing from Bound Documents  Book Shadow                          eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeees 84  Erasing Shadows when Printing              cccccccceeccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeseeeeeseseeeeeeeeesesneeeees 85  Splitting Facing Pages of a Bound Original when Printing  Page split             0     eee 86  Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and Printing  Top Margin                  ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 87  Adjusting the Master Making position  Binding Margin                  cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentttttneeeeees 88  Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum Printing Area  Max  Scan                     000068 90    Rotating the Original 180 Degrees to Make a Master  Rotate                    ccceeeceeseseeeeeeeeeees 91    Contents          Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master  Preview                      eccceeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeees 92  Actions Available on the Preview Screen               ccccceceeeeeccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeceseenceeeeeeeeseenneeeeeetess 93  Checking and Printing the Preview Display                    c cceceeeeeeeceeeeeceneeaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeeeees 93  Functions for Printing 96  Changing the Print Speed  Print Speed Adjustment                      ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 96  Printing at High Speed  High Speed                   ccccccecccccecceceeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeensseeesess 97  Printing More Quiet
87. 8MB 90   P 1 1  Screen     NewsLetter doc Admn Nov22 XX    SAMPLE doc RISO Nov22 XX    Newsletter doc RISO Nov22 XX    Images doc RISO Nov22 XX  Selections Functions            Binding Margin J Preview    hy   Max  Scan Overlay J   aan     Sarai hor   USB Job List Screen is displayed     Caj caja C  Important      e Do not remove the USB Flash Drive until print   ing is finished     ORNETA OVE CEDG                            The Storage Selection Screen appears        Overlaying Storage Data onto a Print Job  Overlay  197    Storing Original Data and Use Method    3 Select the storage data to overlay  Important    e Only one page of data can be retrieved for  Overlay     Storage Selection  aa 5 Touch  Retrieve      1_folder                               document ae l Storage Retrieve Cancel_  _Retrieve_     SAMPLE doc    _   SAMPLE J  Owner  RISO  Newsletter_P2   Format  A4 Date amp Time  Nov22 XX 10 58    Images             ID Print Job      USB Job List         Details on how to select data  see steps 3 and 4 in     Retrieving Stored Data and Printing     p 193                       P 1 4 L          4 Check the stored data     Check the thumbnail to make sure that the data is    Overlay    is set and the screen returns to the  the data you want to retrieve  Functions Screen    When there are several pages  editions   display   the data by touching  lt  or    button  6 Make necessary operation to print     For subsequent operations  see step 6 of    Printing  from a Paper Do
88. Advanced Features    Registering Administrator Users       In order to activate the User Management function  the administrator must be registered   Up to 100 users can be registered  administrator included      Note   e The user registration number  ID  is required when operating    ID print    from the printer driver                                                                                                                                      Create User  Select a Register Frame for a Button   Basic  Layout   mage  Advanced  Option  about  Sp             Print speed     lt Open gt  x  CHigh Speed  Print density  lt Open gt  7  Minterval printing  Copies  E  Auto process  on     Output  Print Only E    Details  E Program printing Details  IF  Output reversal  User Registration Number  ID               gt   m1 ome D n E o s   Activate the Confidential mode after job completes    X  Output the data after initializing printer                                          Basic operation for registering administrator users    1 Display the User Management 2 Touch  Create User    Screen     Follow steps 1 to 4 in    Selecting Recognition and T 7  Identification System      p 117  ser Management    Select management level  Important           Za Management Level j   High Full Management  e Set    Recognized by    in advance     e If you set the group to assign  we recommend      that you set    Rename Group    first    p 127  ll al group aaa ol    Reset all h recognition method   
89. Advanced Features 114  Setting Up User Management  User Management                2     eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 114  Functions of User Managemen tt                c cccccceceeeeececeeeceecencneeeeeeseeaeeeeeesesecueeeeeeseenseaeeees 114  Operation flow of User Management                c cccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseecnieeeeeesenaaes 116  Selecting Recognition and Identification SysteM               ccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 117  Setting Up the Management Level                ccccceceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeececeeeeeeeseeecnaeeeeeesseneieeeeeetsaas 119  Registering Administrator USelrs               cccccccececeeeeceeceeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeseseneeeeeeseseeueeeseeseneeneees 120  Changing Administrator User Registration                ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeteeneeseeeeeeeseeeeteeeees 125  Clearing User Registration               cccccccecccceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeecneeaeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeseeeeueeeeeeeseseneeeeeetees 126  Renaming GroupS           cccccceeecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeesecueeseeesseesneees 127  Reset All User Counters               ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeececeeaeeeeeececaeeceeeeesecneeaeeeseesseaeaeeseseseeaees 128  Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program     sctccsevssseaicavtasnenSroesersdscedn eves seeereaurenwtiarevesenesed 129  How to Programm  PriNt is ecessias fet a ete ed eile cgend detective Tobi lel agen alfa a a Rara EEE eee 131  Setting Up for Programed Printing               c
90. Cl           168 Changing Default Settings  Admin         Advanced Features       Display Access  Button    Functions    Description           System     External Cl Info    If the machine is equipped with the optional IS300  set    the IP address to connect the machine to the network   IP address settings differ depending on the type of network     Note    e To change an input source  touch the applicable  box  or press the key to rotate options    e If the message    Network Communication is Not  Possible    is displayed when touching  External Cl  Info   touch  Cancel  and wait for the 1S300 to finish  starting up  and then try again        Base IP Address    Set the IP address for connecting the machine to a network   IP address settings differ depending on the type of network     Note     e To change an input source  touch the applicable  box  or press the key to rotate options    e Ifthe message    Starting Up Network Card    is displayed  when touching  Base IP Address   touch  Cancel   and wait for the RISO Network Card to finish starting up   approx  1 minute   and then try again     e When using a DHCP server   Use DHCP    e When entering IP address  manually   Manual Input    4   J or the Print Quantity  Keys        Margin Plus Rate    Specify default size reduction rate for the    Margin     setting     90 to 99     Factory default is 94         Auto 90  Rotation   When setting an original of the same size but with a  different orientation from that of the paper l
91. Contrast Range   Change the default settings for the    scanning Lighter Standard Darker  contrast        Contrast   1  2  3  4  5  Auto   Reproduction Size 100   Auto  Change the default setting for the    size      Print Speed 1 2 3 4 5  Change the default setting for the    print speed        When    ECO mode    is set to    ON     this setting is locked    Default  at    3           Print Density  Change the default settings for the    print density      When    ECO mode    is set to    ON     Print Density Level    is locked at    Lighter    and Print Density is locked at    1        e Print Density Level   Lighter Standard Darker  e Print Density   1  2 3 4 5       Scanning Side  ADF     Front Side   gt  Simplex  Back                If the machine is equipped with the optional Auto Side   gt  Simplex  Document Feeder DX 1  select the default scanning   side for simplex original using    Scanning Side  ADF          p 156   OP Auto Process  ON  OFF    Change the default setting for the    Auto Process    when  an optional ADF unit or Job Separator is installed           Changing Default Settings  Admin   167       Advanced Features                                                       Display Access Functions Description  Button  ADF Semi Auto  ON  OFF  Change the default setting for the    ADF Semi Auto     when the ADF unit  option  is installed   Auto Process Mode ON  OFF  Change the default setting for the    Auto Process      Double Feed Check ON  OFF  Change the def
92. Darker  cerengesiinei 58  Pencil  Lighter               cce cesses eseeseeseeeseeeeneeenere 58  PHOtO   2 42  a sath ok ven ee ees ee od 58  Photo Contrast         0   c  ccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesenees 68  Photo Gradation              cccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 69  Photo  Group  crno a 58  Photo  Portrait  ecra 58  Photo  Standard           ceceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 58  PIN Code            e cceecceeeeeeeteeeeeeees 115  117  121  173  PIN Code Input Screen           cc eceecceceeteeeeeee 30  46  Platen Cover Pad             c  cececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 217  Pop Up Message                 cecsceeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeneeeeaes 232  Power Connection                cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnees 10  Power  Switehi ecn aa aE 21  34  Power OFF Schedule             2     cccecceeeeeeeeeeeees 170  Pressure Roller                ccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 219  PIOViCWy Seong tthe cote hee e desk head S 32  55  92  PAE e a e ete eee Se E 160  Print COlOrs a ee et ee aee tapia erai Aasta 172  Print Density                eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 24  99  167  Print Density Adjustment Indicator                  24  99    Print Density Adjustment Keys              ee 24  99  Print Drum  Cylinder             cceeeeseeseeteeneeeee 21  211  Print Drum  Cylinder  Handle                 005 21  211  Print Drum  Cylinder  Release Button           21  211  Print Drum  Cylinder  Replacement                    211  Print  Keyiccia eae saan te 25  Prin
93. Disposal Unit     Pull out the Master Disposal Box and  remove the jammed master    If the masters are difficult to remove  pull out  the Print Drum  Cylinder  and then remove   p 209   p 211   If the error persists  contact your dealer  or  authorized service representative         Master Loading Error  Pull Out Print Cylinder and  Discard Master          The master is not properly  attached to the Print Drum   Cylinder         1  Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  remove the master from the Print  Drum  Cylinder     p 211  2  Return the Print Drum  Cylinder  in place     3  Press the key        When a Message Displays 223          Troubleshooting       Message    Possible Cause    Action       Master Mis Feed   Pull Out Master Making Unit and  Rewind Master Roll  then   Reset Master in Place    The master is improperly  installed     Pull out the Master Making Unit  rewind  the master and reinstall     p 204       Master Not Set in Place   Insert Lead Edge of Master into  Master   Entrance and Close Master Making  Unit    The master is improperly  installed or is missing     Pull out the Master Making Unit and  reinstall the master   p 204    Important      e If the leading edge of the master is  wrinkled or torn  cut the edge straight  and reinstall        Master Remains on Print Drum  Pull Out Print Drum and  Remove Master    An unnecessary master  remains on the Print Drum   Cylinder      1  Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  remove the master from the Print Dr
94. Glass Platen                1st original  2nd original  3rd original  Ath original    Up to 4 originals can be scanned     16 Up  16 on 1     Prints 16 images of the original on one sheet of paper     Single original                         Ivivi   V                      Glass Platen             ajajaja       1st original  2nd original  3rd original  4th original    Up to 4 originals can be scanned     Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print  73    Functions for Master Making      For Multi Up Tickets        le eee eee ee AJAJA AIA             Glass Platen       Multi Up Tickets    cannot be used with multiple originals   The number of images printed is determined by the width of the ticket     Margin       Leave a margin of at least 5 mm  3 46   on the top edge of the Glass Platen  Allowing a proper margin is critical in well   balanced Multi Up positioning      p 19   Note       A margin on the top edge will remain regardless of the enlargement or reduction settings     5mm  3 16        ae       Set Position   Top Side              Orientation of Print Paper       Always place paper in the Feed Tray as shown below       gt     Paper feeding direction    Multi Up Interval        Multi Up  scans a number of sheets of the original   The interval between the first scan and the second scan is called    Multi Up Interval      Replace originals or change settings for the second scan during the    Multi Up Interval        Note   e Default    Multi Up Interva
95. ISO KAGAKU CORPORATION    Adobe   Reader   and Adobe   Acrobat   Reader   are either registered trademarks or    trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries     Acquisition of Color Universal Design Certification   The RISO SE9480 9380  machine  printer driver   is recognized by   the incorporated non profit organization Color Universal Design Organization  CUDO   in achieving Color Universal Design     UNIVERSAL    DESIGN  Windows version         The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice     Copyright    2014 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION    Contents          Welcome to the SE Series  Model   ccccsccceciccccscce sicecdcisesteesneecedersatalaedcecadsuigeasdedseieoeumucartadaaans 7  About This User s  GU i535 aces tess cichs ota Shc rid nan adaubenGautatsntes o0kcole ties pees cpateladasleoleet hori vsdindaddetatnue 7  Icons Used in This Manual sacicccstccccrscencsecieatesadsasdestsansecytcssaaaeasbineescas dees qaitaantaaiiaeeduineinnaa tian 8  Before Starting to Use 10  Safety Guide   linStallleti OM serea ee enea eae EEEa E eae aaee e arin Ei 10  Installation  a T a et ieee a Ta EET 10  Power conne ClO aa ei SA a a AAA aa aae a ete RANA aed a eas 10  Grounding aa E e E E Ne E aenreteees 11  Safety Guide   Handling and Operation                        sseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeneeeeneaaesseesseeeeeseeeeess 12  Operation EnvirOnMent              c ccccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeecceeeeeeeseeceeeecesececee
96. Ink Cartridges or Master Rolls if  necessary     Tray Receiving Tray Paper Guides of the Touch  Continue    Auto control Stacking Tray are  Alternatively  press the key to  incorrectly set  print          When stopping the print job     Action  E Touch  Cancel    Check the Receiving Tray Paper Guides  Alternatively  press the key or  of the Auto control Stacking Tray  the A key to clear     Check Stock of  Symptom  Touch  Close       Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear         Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear         Check the Original Size  The Original Size is larger  than Max  Printing Area     Symptom    As the original size is larger than the  maximum printing area  extra areas may  not be printed      Action   Modify the reproduction size     To change the    Size    setting   Touch  Size Setting       When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue      Alternatively  press the key to  print     When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key or    the key to clear         Check the Settings  The Selected Reproduction  Ratio will not fit the  Max  Printing Area     Symptom    Reproduction size is too large for the  detected original size and exceeds the  maximum printing area      Action   Modify the reproduction size  or set  printing paper of the appropriate size     When changing the    Size    setting   Touch  Size Setting        When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue      Alternativ
97. Management Screen to  return to the Admin  Screen     Advanced Features    Renaming Groups       1 Display the User Management 4 Touch the character buttons to enter    Screen     Follow steps 1 to 4 in    Selecting Recognition and  Identification System      p 117     Touch  Rename Group      User Management       Select management level    Management Level    High Full Management    Input user and group information     create User   Cereme ram      Reset all counters Select     P    Reset Counter Recognized by f       3 Touch the Group button to rename     Rename Group    Select a Button Name to be Changed             a new name        Renare Cej  w jA  RE ES ED KUED ES 00 0S ES    CLIC CIC GICIC Le Ile J  CI JJ  ALL            Change capitalization by selecting the  Small  or   Capital  button   p 136    Note   e You can enter up to 10 characters     Touch  OK      Returns to the Rename Group Screen   The group name is renamed     Touch  Close    Returns to the User Management Screen   To close the User Management setting  touch     Close  on the User Management Screen to  return to the Admin  Screen     Setting Up User Management  User Management  127    Advanced Features    Reset All User Counters       All user counters can be cleared in a single procedure     Important    e After the counters are cleared  they cannot be recovered     1 Display the User Management  Screen     Follow steps 1 to 4 in    Selecting Recognition and  Identification System      p 117     2 Tou
98. N GC     Resets current settings  once opened    C    6       Note        When an administrator is registered in User  Management  the Recognition Screen is dis   played    Operate the screen to log in as the administra   tor  If already identified as the administrator  the  Recognition Screen will not be displayed   Users other than administrator are prohibited              On the Admin  Screen  the current setting is displayed on the right side of each button       When    Recognized by    is set to     PIN Code       Input the administrator s PIN Code using the  Print Quantity Keys and touch  OK      Input the PIN code      When    Recognized by    is set to     USB Flash Drive       Connect the administrator s registered USB  Flash Drive to the USB slot     Insert the registered  USB flash drive    ey     e    The Admin  Screen is displayed once access  has been identified     Changing Default Settings  Admin   173    Advanced Features    3 Select a function to modify           A DirectAccess Entry  Display Selections Entry J    Default       Display Priority f   Mode Screen    Mode  Pen J   Mode Select     Editor Start Up Screen   Logo SE     P1111    gt      Display Access Buttons   Display Access Buttons allow the quick selection  of desired functions by displaying only relevant  groups of function buttons     All   All Functions    Display   Functions related to Screen Display   Default   Basic Operational Functions   System   Functions affecting the entire System   E
99. Optional Device Area                  ccccceeeceeeeteeeeteeeeees 32  Optional Device Error               cccccccceseceeenees 222  224  Orientation of Print Paper                 c ceeeeeeeeeees 74  Original eraen cused tavad ee r Aden 18  Original Margin           ccceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19  Output reversal                cceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 153  Overlay  secre nine AE i 197  Owner NaM Ennan g 190  P   P KOY rraian A O T 24  Page Orientation  0        eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneees 172  Paper tirien a et ee 65  Paper Arranger                 scccseeeeeeeeees 21  37  38  39  Paper Document                  cececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenees 43  Paper Ejection Adj  a   se 168  Paper Feed Adj         cccccceccceccsecceeaeecenecesteceeeceeeeees 105  Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever         20  36  Paper Feed Tray                 cceeceeeeeeeeeteeeees 20  34  36  Paper Guide                cccccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenees 34  Paper Jam Error          cccccccscccccssecceeeseeeeessees 223  228  Paper Jumping WING      s 21  105  Paper Receiving Tray                   ceeseee 21  37  38  Paper Recommendations                    ccccceeeeeeees 16  Paper Size s  2ec2  cec Saint cise tei  65  Paper Stopper           c cccccessccesesseeeeesees 21  37  38  39  Pause before    Master                  ccccssseceeeeeeeeees 50  57  Pause before    Print  00 0    ccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 51  57  Pencil  tetccec 2n eatin eae net ie 58  Pencil  
100. Original Orientation and Print Results       The orientation of the original differs depending upon the number of images   The orientation and print results for each possibility are shown below     2 Up    Prints two copies of the same original side by side on one sheet of paper           Glass Platen    Multi Up Print  For Single Original and Multiple Original     Note    When    Multiple Original    is used in Multi Up Print  the actual number of pages to be scanned is specified  In the  case that the actual number of pages in the document is less than the number of pages specified in the mode set   tings  set equivalent number of blank pages in the machine to make up for the specified number   For example  if  you want to make eight pages and there are only three originals  add a blank page to the originals and set the four  sheets for scanning        2 Up  2 on 1     Single original       A       For multiple originals          Glass Platen    2nd original 1st original    Up to 2 originals can be scanned     72 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print     Functions for Master Making      4 Up  4 on 1     Prints four images of the original on one sheet of paper     Single original     gt    gt                For multiple originals  o  D gt   o  D gt              Glass Platen       2nd original 1st original    Up to 2 originals can be scanned     8 Up  8 on 1     Prints eight images of the original on one sheet of paper     Single original       2    
101. Setting Up User Management  User Management       Setting the Group to assign  When you set up a group by user  user usage can be  counted by group    p 160  It is recommended to enter the group name in  advance    p 127    Touch  Group  on the Register  Screen     Register         Rename   User 01 Input the PIN code    Group   OFF    5    J oFF    Disable   OFF        1 8 digits        2 Touch the Group button to set     Group    Select the group             Note     e If you are not setting up a group  touch  OFF        Set    Rename Group    if needed     p 127    3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Register Screen   The user is assigned to the group that you have  set        Advanced Features      Setting the Upper Limit of the User   s  Usage  Set the upper limit of the number of copies masters   Up to 99 999 999 can be set     The present copy count and master count can also  be cleared on the same screen     Touch  Limit  on the Register  Screen     Register       Rename J User 01 Input the PIN code  Group   G 1  Limit   J OFF    i e   OFF     1 8 digits           Touch the limit input box and enter  the upper limit number using the  Print Quantity Keys        Linit    User 01    Limit C C  Present C C    Limit M C    Present M C       C C  Copy Count  M C  Master Count    Note     To clear the number  press the key      Present C C    and    Present M C    show the cur   rent amount of copies and masters that the user  used       To clear the    Present C C    and    Pres
102. Touch  OK      Returns to the Create User Screen   Registered setting is updated     Create User  Select a Button to be Changed    Lo  amin j    Boer   7 Touch  Close      Returns to the User Management Screen              To close the User Management setting  touch   Close  on the User Management Screen to  return to the Admin  Screen              Setting Up User Management  User Management  125    Advanced Features    Clearing User Registration       1 Display the User Management  Screen     Follow steps 1 to 4 in    Selecting Recognition and  Identification System      p 117     2 Touch  Create User      User Management    Select management level  Management Level    High Full Management    Input user and group information    Reset all N recognition method       Important      Once the user registration is cleared  it cannot  be recovered     3 Touch  Clear      Create User    Select a Button to be Cleared          126 Setting Up User Management  User Management        4 Touch the User Button to clear     Create User             C4   pai  gt   gt         Registered buttons are displayed with a solid line   Unregistered buttons and    0 Admin    button are  grayed out and are not available     5 Touch  OK      1  User 01    This user will be deleted  J OK     Cm       Returns to the Create User Screen   The setting of the selected user is cleared     6 Touch  Close    Returns to the User Management Screen   To close the User Management setting  touch     Close  on the User 
103. Tray Paper Guides to the limits  Then  close the Paper Feed Tray                             36 Preparing to Print    Basic Operations    Setting up the Paper Receiving Tray       1 Open the Paper Receiving Tray                             Pull the Paper Receiving Tray down until it comes  to a rest     2 Position the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides   1  Raise the Receiving Tray Paper Guides     2  Hold their lower part and slide them to fit to  the paper width                    Important      e For thick paper such as drawing paper  position  the Receiving Tray Paper Guides a little wider  than the actual paper width     3 Set the Paper Stopper     1  Raise the Paper Stopper   2  Slide to fit the length of the paper                       4 Adjust the Paper Arrangers     Jan    Alignment of paper is affected by sizes and  strength of paper  Adjust the Paper Arrangers so  that printed paper is aligned    Press the Paper Arranger to push the plates out   pull the plates up to pull them in                For plain paper                   Press to open all four Paper Arrangers       For plain paper with images  lopsided on page                   Press to open the two Paper Arrangers on the  more heavily printed side       For thick paper                   Press to open the two Paper Arrangers  right  and left  closer to the machine     Preparing to Print 37    Basic Operations    Closing the Paper Receiving Tray    Remove all the printed copies and follow the steps  below     1  Sl
104. a         1 10     Numeric keypad is available for input   EE     e        3 Touch  4  or W to set the number of  Skip Rotations for the Print Drum   Cylinder      Select Print Quantity  l Interval Cee J x J          OFF Skip Rotation     lt a ay     1 10     Numeric keypad is available for input  za  ES  TAN Lay          104 Extending the drying time  Interval     Functions for Printing    Paper Feed Output Settings for Special  Paper and Printing Types   Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl     Paper feed and output settings can be adjusted when using special paper or uneven print finishes       Jump Wing Control    The following steps retrieves pre configured custom settings for   the Paper Jumping Wing  Use this feature to eject certain printing   paper that is hard to eject with automatically adjusted normal   Paper Jumping Wing setting    Important     e    Jump Wing Control    feature is not available unless pre config   ured    e Only one setting can be pre configured       To pre configure or to change settings  please contact your dealer  or authorized service representative      Note     e The Paper Jumping Wing is a device which helps eject printed paper onto the Auto control Stacking Tray or the  Paper Receiving Tray   It automatically adjusts according to the position of the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever  NORMAL or  CARD                 Special Paper Ctrl  You can save settings for easy retrieval next time  The    Special Paper Ctrl    menu contains the
105. age Displays    Troubleshooting                   Error Number Error Types Description Reference  page  Displays when an original document or printing  J00 000 Paper Jam Error fie p 228  paper is jammed              T00 000 Service Call Error  in alphabetical order        Message    Possible Cause    Action       l Battery Replacement    Call Service    The battery is low or depleted     Contact your dealer  or authorized service  representative  and have the battery  replaced     Press the key or the key to clear    the error message display         System Error    Press Reset Key  If Recovery has Failed  Call Service        System Error    Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON  If Recovery has Failed  Call Service          A system error has occurred     Press the key   If the problem persists  contact your dealer   or authorized service representative            Shut off power  then restart   If the problem persists  contact your dealer   or authorized service representative         A00 000 Jam Errors  in alphabetical order        Message    Possible Cause    Action       Master Disposal Error  Pull Out Print Cylinder and  Discard Master    The master was not properly  discarded     1  Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  remove the master from the Print  Drum  Cylinder     p 211  2  Return the Print Drum  Cylinder  in place     3  Press the key        Master Jammed in Disposal Unit  Pull Out Master Disposal Box and  Remove Jammed Master    The master is jammed in the  Master 
106. an the original  the edges of  the original were processed as shadows   Set the same size of paper as the original  and perform the master making operation  again  Or attach tape as described below  to solve the problem           When printing thick paper such as  cards  corners of the paper contacted  and damaged the master        Make another master and print with the  new master  Or pull out the Print Drum   Cylinder  and attach cellophane tape to  the damaged section on the master   However  if attached with cellophane tape   a master may not been properly sent to  the Master Disposal Box        Troubleshooting       Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action       The back of the printed paper  is smudged with Ink    Sy    The Pressure Roller has been stained  with Ink     Remove the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  clean the Pressure Roller     p 216   If the print position is outside the print  paper  this may cause the Pressure Roller  to be stained with Ink    Be careful when changing the size of print  paper or shifting the print position        The Feed Tray Paper Guides were  not fit to the width of paper at the time  of the master making process     Adjust the Feed Tray Paper Guides to the  width of the paper    If the Feed Tray Paper Guides are set  wider than the width of the paper  a master  will become wider than necessary   p 34       Are you using a paper that does not  efficiently absorb Ink     The Ink did not dry fast enough  marking  onto the r
107. ash Drives  use the    RISO Utility Software     RISO USB PRINT MANAGER   included in the provided software CD ROM   If you change folder names by Explorer  they will not be recognized  by the machine  For details  see the    RISO Utility Software User s Guide     CD ROM     You can change the order of the storage data and USB Flash Drive data    p 195    187    Storing Original Data and Use Method    Converting Hard copies to Stored Data   Scan Mode     Scan mode is a function that allows you to scan a hard copy original with the machine s scanner to save as storage  data or USB Flash Drive data    You can repeatedly retrieve and print previously scanned and stored original data  This saves you the trouble of re   scanning the documents when repeatedly printing the same materials     p 186   This function also prevents documents from getting lost or damaged over time     Important     e The storage function is not available in the machine equipped with the optional RISO IS300 controller  The data  scanned in the Scan Mode is stored in IS300    Note     e Delete unnecessary stored data when the remaining free space of the optional Document Storage Card or USB  Flash Drive is limited  The free space is displayed in the Storage Selection Screen or USB Job List Screen     p 196  The following functions can be used in scan mode  See the explanation of each function for more details   e Image     p 58  e 2 Up Multi Up Print        p 71   e Contrast    p 60  e Preview  7 p 92   e S
108. ast  Contrast Adj     For originals that have ill defined photos  adjust the contrast to print more clearly   There are two ways to adjust the contrast     Important    e If an    Image    is set to    Line        Duo     or    Pencil        Contrast Adj    cannot be used     Touch  Contrast Adj  on the Func   tions Screen     O Ready to Make Master    Selections W Functions    Program   Tone Curve J  Contrast Adj J Book Shadow j  P  1 4 L gt                          2 Touch the button of the contrast to use     O Readv to Make Master  Contrast Adj    aid lata                             Lighter   Lightens dark sections    Use this setting if the entire photo is underex   posed and the target subject of the photo is ill   defined      Darker   Clarifies lighter portions    Use this setting if the entire photo is overex   posed and the target subject of the photo is ill   defined     3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen     Contrast Adj     setting is updated        68 Adjusting Photo Contrast  Contrast Adj     Functions for Master Making    Adjusting Photo Gradation  Tone Curve     You can adjust the light and shadow portions of a photo by 3 tones respectively     Important    e If an    Image    is set to    Line        Tone Curve    cannot be used     Touch  Tone Curve  on the Func   tions Screen     O Ready to Make Master  Selections Functions    Job Memory J Mult Print J       Contrast Adj Book Shadow          Touch the    Lights    and    Shadows     adjustme
109. ault setting for the    D Feed Check     i   Job Separation  ON  OFF  Change the default setting for the    Job Separation     when the Job Separator  option  is installed   Jump Wing Control ON  OFF  Change the default positioning of the Paper Jumping  Wing    Default  W9  Important    e This option is available only when the special paper  setting is pre configured  Contact your dealer  or  authorized service representative  to pre configure  this setting   Paper Ejection Adj Air Blow  ON  OFF  Change the default settings for    Paper Ejection Adj       Separation Fan  OFF  1  2  3  4  Pre suction Fan  ON  OFF  Suction Fan  1  2  3  4  Default Folder  Scan Data Folder  6 folders  When the optional Document Storage Card is PC Job Folder  6 folders  attached  change the folder to which data scanned in  the scan mode to be saved and the folder in which data  sent from the computer is saved   Custom Paper Entry  p 178  Specify paper dimensions before using non standard  sized paper   Irregular Fitter SE9480U OFF  Ledger  Legal   Specifies to scan custom size originals as standard  Letter  LetterR   sized  Statement  SE9380  OFF  A3  B4  A4  A4R   B5  B5R  Foolscap   System  Folder Renaming  6 folders  When the optional Document Storage Card is  attached  changes the name of the folder used to save  data   Cl Select Internal Cl  External Cl  Choose between    Internal CI    and    External CI     settings   If the machine is equipped with the optional IS300   select    External 
110. available   Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl Screen and the    Select Print Quantity desired setting is retrieved     Confirm the settings made   Functions j  Note     e Repeat steps 2 to 4 to retrieve other settings     Confidential    5 Touch  Close    Special Paper Ctrl  Returns to the Functions Screen and the settings    are updated   Ca   P  414 After this  follow the same operations for normal  printing           2 Touch  Entry Call      Special Paper Ctrl       Entrv Call    Paper Feed Adj  S Tray Uppe  hy  Paper Feed A int  Paper Eject Adj   A  Blow  4 Separation Fan    Pre suction Fan  Suction Fan          Display the Parameter List Screen     3 Touch  Retrieve                           Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl  109    Functions for Printing    Making changes to Special Paper Ctrl Setting       1 Display the Parameter List Screen  5 Touch  Revise  on the Special Paper  Follow steps 1 to 2   p 109   Ctrl Screen   2 Touch  Retrieve   Special Paper Ctrl          Poster Entry Call J Revise  Paper Feed Adj  S Tray Upper Limit  Paper Feed Amount       Paper Eject adj A  Blow  4 Separation Fan    Pre suction Fan  Suction Fan                         6 Touch  OK      Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl Screen after  parameters have been revised                       4 Change the setting parameters     Parameters for the following can be changed      Paper Feed Adj     and    Paper Eject Adj        N
111. b is completed  even if the actual printing is still under way    If another person accidentally initiates another job from the computer  a new master will be made  discarding the cur   rent one    By extending    Reserve Period     such interruption can be prevented  We recommend that you activate the    Reserva   tion    setting when temporarily pausing a job or when printing leaflets etc  to prevent interruption     Note     Select from 5  10  or 30 minutes as the    Reserve Period    on the Admin  Screen  The factory default is 5 minutes   p 169    The following operations do not count towards reservation period         When the machine is operating  making a master  printing  confidential action  idling  etc        When the Job Separator  option  is operating       When Control Panel buttons are being entered       When the Setup Screen for some function is displayed    Auto Sleep and Auto Power OFF will be disabled during the reservation period   Auto Sleep Auto Power OFF  timer re activates after the reservation period is up   Power OFF Schedule  will not shut off until that time on the next day    p 170    Touch  Reservation  on the Functions  Screen     OREA ON EC ERGI    Selections Functions  Top Margin   ADF Semi Auto  Binding Margin J Preview  Max  Scan Overlay J    Ca  en DD    Reservation period is extended                          148 Extending the Reserve Period  Reservation     Idling Action  Idling Action     Idling action prevents the machine from printing 
112. be Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader software can be freely downloaded from the Adobe website     http   www adobe com       RISO Utility Software  The software package includes the    RISO USB PRINT MANAGER    and    RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER      e    RISO USB PRINT MANAGER     Application that manages the original data stored in the USB Flash Drive on the computer     e    RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER     Application that manages the counter data  number of prints  masters  etc   output to the USB Flash Drive on    the computer     Connection with a Computer 15    Before Starting to Use    Paper Recommendations    Size and Weight Restrictions       The table shows the specifications of the usable print paper        Usable Printing Paper          Size Weight  Minimum Size 100 mm x 148 mm  315 4    x 513 46   46 g m  to 210 g m2  Maximum Size 320 mm x 432 mm  1219 32  x 17     12 lb bond to 110 Ib index                  Up to 555 mm  2127 39   of vertical paper dimension may be used when the machine is on    Extended Paper    mode  p 178  p 180    Important      e Even when using paper whose sizes and weight are supported by the machine  it may not pass through the  machine depending on factors such as the paper quality  ambient conditions  and storage conditions  For more  information  consult your dealer  or authorized service representative      Do not use the following types of paper  as they can cause jams or misfeeds     e Extremely thin paper   Using the Paper Feed Tray  less tha
113. bjects on the machine  The objects might fall and cause injury   Contact your dealer  or authorized service representative  before moving the machine     A Caution    Never insert fingers  etc  into the openings around Paper Feed Tray and Paper Receiving Tray  This can result in injury   Do not touch the moving parts of the machine  This may cause injury    When you insert a hand inside the machine to remove paper  etc   be careful not to touch protruding objects or the  edges of the plates  This may cause injury    Be careful not to touch the areas around the Print Drum  Cylinder  or inside the machine when the Print Drum  Cyl   inder  is removed  as Ink may be present on those areas    When Ink has stuck to your hands  etc   wash it off with detergent as soon as possible     The tips of the paper separation hook and master removal hook are sharp  When you insert a hand inside the  machine to remove paper  be careful not to touch the paper separation hook or master removal hook  This may  cause injury    Do not open any covers or move the machine during operation    Unplug the power cord  if you do not use the machine for a long time     The machine has precision parts and driving parts inside  Do not handle the machine in other ways than described  in this manual     Do not subject the machine to physical shock   Do not stand the Print Drum  Cylinder  vertically  Doing so may pollute the floor  etc   Allow plenty of ventilation during printing     Important       Do not unp
114. cated stand      2 The weight does not include Ink and Master    3 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air  Degree    2    corresponds to general    indoor environment     258 Specifications    RISO SE9380    Master making printing methods  Original Type    Original Size  min  max      Original Paper Weight    Printing Paper Size  min  max      Paper Supply Capacity  Paper Receiving Capacity    Printing Paper Weight    Image Processing mode    Master making Time    Printing Area  max      Print Reproduction Ratio    Print Speed    Print Position Adjustment  Ink Supply   Master Supply Disposal  Master Disposal Capacity  User Interface    Optional Accessories    Appendix    High speed digital master making full automatic stencil printing  Book  10 kg  22 Ib  or less   sheet    When using the Glass Platen    50 mm x 90 mm  131 32  x 317 30     310 mm x 432 mm  127 32  x 17    When using the Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  option     100 mm x 148 mm  315 16  x 513 46     310 mm x 432 mm  127 39  x 17    When using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  option     105 mm x 128 mm  41 8  x 51 32     297 mm x 432 mm  111 46  x 17      When using the Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  option    50 g m   13 lb bond    128 g m   34 Ib bond    When using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  option    Single sided feeding    40 g m2  11 lb bond    128 g m   34 Ib bond   Duplex sided feeding    52 g m   14 lb bond    105 g m   28 Ib bond      100 mm x 148 mm  315 46  x 
115. cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeseeieaeeeeseeeees 132  SAVING  Programs ee ienen a eaaa aaa aa Ea E el ceadoeas hadi devevaveenlceedeatal i leceevs 134  Renaming a  Programi is  isis ccsecetieseesiecencadeanens leswagaveiecguandeet enc ASEN OEE EEEE eee eed 135  Retrieving   Program  aiiis ne tanaan aa aea a a aaia T ier TNS 137  Clearing Programs               ccccccccececeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeceeaeaeeeeeececaeaeeeeeesceaeaeeeeeeescneeseeeeeseseeaneeeeess 138  Making changes to Stored Programs                ccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeesesneeseeeeeensnaees 139  Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory                c ccceeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeees 140  Storing Job  MEmOry setast chan ee ee aae EEEE A TE aa a eed ien ana Taani ea 141  Renaming a JOD Memory sitieni r aiai iene a iaae ae o aeae 142  Retrieving a Job Memory and Printing       eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereesesesserrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrtrssetserreerrene 144  Clearing  JOD  MEMORY ien a e E a e ne aea AE EE E a el nae E ETE et 146    Protecting Confidential Documents  Confidential                        cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 147    Contents       Extending the Reserve Period  Reservation                        e sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneeeeeeees 148  Idling  Action  dling ACton  s  deeth cil a ne td e o aaa EE eaae 149  Reproducing the Master  Renew Page  Auto Page Renewal                   ccccccseeeseeeeeeeeeees 150  Using Page  Renewals ri ereen aaepe
116. ce representative  and have the  battery replaced     Message Symptom Action How to Clear a Pop Up Message   Low Battery    Symptom  Touch  Close    Call Service Low battery   Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear     Action          Maintenance    Call Service           Symptom   Notifies user about the need for a periodic  maintenance      Action   Contact your dealer  or authorized  service representative         Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the    key to clear         232 When a Message Displays          F00 000 Warning Messages  in alphabetical order     Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message       Auto Page Size Selection  is Not Available for  Irregular Size Original  Select Format Size to Store  and then Restart     Cause 1   Attempting to scan an irregular size  original using    Auto    in scanning mode      Action   Select the original size manually      Cause 2   A normal size original has been set in  the wrong position      Action   Lift the Platen Cover Pad up and set the  original correctly     e To specify the format for saving  Touch  Saving Format        To cancel scanning  Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or  the   2  key to clear         Auto Paper Size Selection  is Not Available   for Irregular Size Original  Select Paper Size Manually  and then Press START Key     Cause 1   Attempting to copy an irregular size  original using    Auto         Action   Select a Feed T
117. ceeeceseesseeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 173  Setting Up Direct Access Area and Selections Tab   DirectAccess Entry   Selections Entry                  ccccccccccsseeesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeees 176  Registering a Custom Paper Size  Custom Paper Entry                  ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 178  Entering sizes and Changing NAMEG               cccceee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tte eteeeeeeeeeneeaaes 178  Deleting a Custom Paper Size oo    ce ccccccceeeeeeeecseeceeeeeeeseesaeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeseneeenaas 181  Keeping Masters Secure After Printing  Protect                         cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 182  Preventing Leaks of Masters After Creation or Disposal                      cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 183  Storing Original Data and Use Method 186  Converting Hard copies to Stored Data  Scan Mode                  ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 188  Scanning a Hard copy Original                cccccceceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeessnieaeeeeeetees 189  Setting Data Information              cccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeceseeeeeeseeeaeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 190  SPECHYING StOrEd SIZE ear a aed adh ea eee cade meth vara eee aa dh ezeees 192  Retrieving Stored Data and Printing  Storage Memory  USB Job List                      0068 193  Retrieving Stored Data             cccccccccececceceeceeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeseeeaeaeeeeeesseieaseseesese
118. ception  which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on  the user is encouraged to try  to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures      Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna      Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver      Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected      Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help     Contains IC  4819A RFR6    Operation is subject to the following two conditions   1  this device may not cause interference  and  2  this device  must accept any interference  including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device     CAN ICES 3 B  NMB 3 B        Perchlorate Material special handling may apply  See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate  This product may contain certain substances which are restricted when disposed   Therefore  be sure to consult your contracted service dealer              Warning   For SE9380A Model Only   This is a Class A product  In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the  user may be required to take adequate measures           For SE9380E Model Only    CE    R amp TTE directive Class1 device               This product contains RFID  Radio Frequency Identification  System     Notice for European Union Member States    RISO  the environment and the Waste Electrical and Electronic  Equipment Directive  WEEE Directive  
119. ch  Reset Counter      User Management    Select management level      High Full Management    Input user and group information    Reset all counters Select recognition method    Reset Counter   Recognized by         3 Touch  OK      All user   s counter  will be reseted  OK     Cm       Returns to the User Management Screen   All user counters are cleared     To close the User Management settings  touch   Close  on the User Management Screen to  return to the Admin  Screen        128 Setting Up User Management  User Management     Advanced Features    Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program        Program    feature saves you from repeatedly having to enter how many copies to print  by assigning the number of  copies per sets in advance  Operation stops after printing each set of copies    Store a    Program    setting for easy retrieval later    Sample usage for this feature  in a school setting  you can pre assign the number of copies  sheets  per class  set    and then assign the number of classes per grade  group  in the entire school       Program    consists of two types     Single    and    Multiple        Important    e    Program    is not available when    Auto Page Renewal    is selected       Single Page Mode    From a single original document  print into multiple groups of sets    A maximum of 150 groups can be created  each having up to 99 sets  Each set can be up to 9999 copies    The machine can be configured to specify how many copies  sheets  per set  then h
120. chine goes into the sleep mode after a cer   tain period of time has passed after the confirma   tion message was displayed  and then the sleep  mode is cancelled  or the power is turned ON      F94 007     Protect       Discard Current Master          om    Touch  OK  to discard the master remaining on the  Print Drum  Cylinder      184 Keeping Masters Secure After Printing  Protect        Cancel the    Protect    setting    Only the administrator can cancel the    Protect    setting     Touch  Admin   on the Basic Screen  for each mode     OREA COREL ERGI    Contrast Size    Page  A4     100     D Feed  Check       1  Black    sue       2 Touch  OK      OREA OR ELECE VERGI    Resets current settings  once opened    C             If the Recognition Screen is displayed  follow the  message on the screen  See step 2 in    Customiz   ing Default Settings      p 173     Advanced Features    3 Touch  Protect      User Management j        m   12hour  Auto Page renewal     OFF                After a    Please Wait a Moment    message is dis   played  the    Protect    setting is canceled        Keeping Masters Secure After Printing  Protect  185    186    Storing Original Data and Use  Method    The machine can store original data  To use this function  the optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash Drive  is required    Stored original data can be repeatedly retrieved for printing    There are two methods of storing original data     Storage Memory    and    USB Flash Drive      
121. ck Air Blow   Ink Saving Contrast Adj Jump Wing Control Separation Fan   Size Tone Curve Auto Process Pre suction Fan  Margin  Binding margin Interval Suction Fan   Paper Size Print Quantity ADF Semi Auto    Max  Scan Print Speed Sorter    Book Shadow Print Density Job Separation                          Available with optional device    140 Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory     Advanced Features    Storing Job Memory                1 Set various settings for a print job  4 Confirm settings   Touch  Job Memory  on the Func  Status Check Comi J C  tions Screen      M 2   Register P 1 4                          01  Image m Photo  O Ready to Make Master 02  Dot Process   OFF       03  Contrast me  Functions 04  Ink Saving OFF    E T  E AES  08 Margit See  07  Paper Size   Auto  Job Mamo MultUp Print e a ae See T a      Spe orem aay pepe ae   mit   a0 a A UN iedetedrttined Y              Contrast Adj J Book Shadow               Touch 5 and scroll down to check all items     Note  Note   e Job Memory Screen can also be invoked by   To change a setting  touch  Cancel  and start  pressing the key on the Print Quantity over again   Return to step 1    Keys   5 Touch  OK    3 Touch an unused button  Returns to the Job Memory Screen  Settings are  updated     Job Memory Each job memory can be named for your conve   Select a Register Frame for a Button nience  See step 2 in    Renaming a Job Memory       p 142    Register     p      Retrieve       Rename    Clear                Unu
122. ck Hide    When a proof copy is printed  the Print Basic  Screen will be displayed automatically    Check the proof copy  e g   print position and den   sity    If necessary  change the print position and den   sity    e Print Position   p 100    e Print Density  p 99      Interval  p 104    e Jump Wing Control  p 105           proof copy     Important      e When the machine has not been used for a long  period of time  the print quality may suffer due  to dry Ink on the Print Drum  Cylinder      Press the key to print proof copies sev   eral times     Note     e You can also adjust the print position  the den   sity  and the speed while the print process is in  progress     10 Enter the number of copies using  the Print Quantity Keys   The specified number is displayed on the Print  Quantity Display   Note     e To change the number  press the key   then re enter the correct number        Basic Operations    11 Press the key           START a  Cm  oO    The specified number of copies will be printed     Note     e Press the Gos  key to interrupt printing operation  currently underway    When printing from a computer  if the machine  is inactive for a certain period of time  it deter   mines that the current job is completed  even if  the actual printing is still under way  If another  person accidentally initiates another job from  the computer  this will cause a new master to be  made  discarding the current one  To prevent  this  you may set a    Reserve Period     We rec
123. cument or Book     7 p 43        Tip   Overlaying Storage Data  The stored data overlays at the size it was saved  You cannot enlarge reduce the size to match the original or paper size     Stored data Original Print results       Stored data Original  kej  lt L    The storage data is overlaid after being centered at the top of the original  You cannot adjust the overlay position                       198 Overlaying Storage Data onto a Print Job  Overlay     Storing Original Data and Use Method    Copying Moving Stored Data    Data can be copied or moved between the Storage Memory and the USB Flash Drive   This is useful for performing backup or when the remaining free space of the Storage Memory or USB Flash Drive is  limited     Note     e Itis not possible to copy move data within the Storage Memory or USB Flash Drive     The original data stored in the USB Flash Drive can be organized or managed by a computer using the    RISO Util   ity Software     RISO USB PRINT MANAGER  included in the provided CD ROM  For details  see the    RISO Utility  Software User   s Guide     CD ROM      The  ID Print Job  is maintained even if it is copied or moved    The procedure for copying moving data from the Storage Memory to the USB Flash Drive is explained here     1 Confirm that the USB Flash Drive 3 Touch the storage data to copy   that will store the data is connected  move     If the USB Flash Drive is not connected  connect  the USB Flash Drive to the USB slot                    
124. de Flap   p 204   30  Thermal Print Head   p 217   31  Master Roll Holder   p 204   32  Master Roll   p 204   33  Paper Arranger     p 39   Press to open for aligning printed paper   34  Receiving Tray Paper Guides   p 39   Aligns printed paper neatly     Automatically adjusted to the width of paper to be  printed     35  Paper Stopper   p 39   Automatically adjusted to the length of print paper size   36  Auto control Stacking Tray   p 39   Printed copies are output to this tray   37  Receiving Tray Paper Guides    Opening Button   7 p 22   p 40   For details  refer to the next page     Function and Name of Each Part 21    Getting Acquainted    Tip    Using the Receiving Tray Paper Guides    Opening Button   The Opening Button for the Receiving Tray Paper Guides on the Auto control Stacking Tray is used as follows   depending on machine status                       e During standby  when paper is discharged onto the Auto control Stacking Tray      Press the Opening Button to open the Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper so that paper can be removed      During standby  when the Auto control Stacking Tray is empty        Press the Opening Button to move the Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper to the storage position so that the  Auto control Stacking Tray can be closed        During printing        Press the Opening Button to move the Receiving Tray Paper Guides 1 mm  3 64   outwards each time  The  Opening Button can be used in this way to jog paper on the receiving tray  etc
125. direction  within   15 mm   19 39    and in the vertical direction  within   10 mm   25   4   after making a master   The indicator above the keys shows the offset amount  from the center   To clear the offset amount  press 9        24 Control Panel    Getting Acquainted       2021 1918 17    MASTER MAKIN                                         13 1415 16    13  Start Key    Starts master making  print processing  or executes  specified operations   The key lights up only when the key is active     14  Proof Key   p 102     Use when you want to check the print result after adjust   ing the print position  for example    This allows you to print proof copies without affecting the  value on the Print Quantity Display     15  Stop Key  Stops current operation in progress  During the master   making procedure  the machine will not stop until the  master making process is completed    16  Reset Key  Returns all settings to the initial settings  and clears the  error screen on the display after a system error has been  resolved    17  Wake Up Key  Wakes up the printer in Energy Saving mode   Also use this key to log out from the machine     18  Auto Process Key   p 66   Performs non stop operation from master making  through printing  When activated  the indicator besides  the key lights up    19  Print Key  Makes the printer ready for printing     20  Master Making Key    Makes the printer ready for making masters     21  Progress Arrows    Indicates master making and printing pro
126. ditor   Functions related to Editor       System    H       aidi              Change settings   Some functions have their own Setup Screens   some don t  There are several styles for setting    values  Following samples demonstrate different  value setting styles       No additional Setup Screen     2 or more options to choose from   Touch the function name button to change the  value displayed to the right     Admin     A DirectAccess Entry  Display Selections Entry         Default Display Priority    f   Mode Screen    System Mode Key Pattern J  Mode Select              Editor Start Up Screen   Logo SE           174 Changing Default Settings  Admin           Additional Setup Screen Available    Button Style  Choosing a button makes it default        Image Processing       Line    Photo    B       Duo    Xi       Pencil    M          Additional Setup Screen Available    Numeric Value Style   Touch to increase decrease value   Numbers may be entered using the Print  Quantity Keys        Clock Calendar    Cancel   OK                                              Numeric keypad is available for input          Additional Setup Screen Available    Multi Level Entry Style   Select a button  then set its values either by  touching more buttons or entering a value  numerically     Power OFF Schedule Cancel  OK      Power is to be shut off at a specified time           OFF paN  Hour m  4      Numeric keypad is available for input           Power OFF Schedule       Power is to be shut 
127. e  Page      Line mage Type    fZ  Duo E a   Gi cw             M                 Black mide Info       e  Line   Only text contained  e g   text docu   ment  newspaper        Photo   Only photos contained      Duo   Both text and photos contained        Pencil   pencil drawings or lightly printed doc   uments    58 Selecting Image Processing Mode  Image     Touch  Photo    Duo   or  Pencil  to select more  detailed settings                                            Image    Detailed Description   settings     Photo    Standard Select this setting for photos other than   Portrait  or  Group     Portrait Select this setting for pictures of one or  two individuals from the bust up  This  type of image processing is particularly  good for printing photos of faces    Group Select this setting for group photos that  are over exposed  This process is  effective for restoring facial features that  have got washed out because of flash   The Group setting is not for photos with  faces that are overly dark  It may be  more effective to select  Standard  for  such photos     Duo    Line Select this setting for printing small text  clearly    Photo Select this setting for printing more  clearly  brightly     Shadow off   Select this setting for clearing the  background color of the dark colored  originals  such as newspapers     Shadow off  is selectable aside from   Line  and  Photo      Pencil    Darker Select this setting for printing faint  originals clearly    Lighter Select this se
128. e Process   ing Current Data    The machine is receiving the document  data from the computer    While the data is being transmitted   Scan Mode is disabled     Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key to  clear         Processing Print Data  from PC   This Function is Not  Available while Process   ing Current Data    The machine is receiving the document  data from the computer    While the data is being transmitted   Scan mode is disabled     Touch  Close     Initiate the Print job after the  transmission is complete  or print from  the machine           Protect       Discard Current Master     Symptom      Protect    function is set to ON      Action   Perform    Confidential    if necessary    p 183      To set the    Confidential      Touch  OK     e To cancel the    Confidential      Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key to  clear         Reached to the limit count  Contact the administrator     Symptom    The upper limit for master making   printing set by the administrator was  reached      Action   Contact your Administrator     Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the    key to clear           Scanning is Not Possible    External Cl is not Connected  or Processing Connection  Check Cable Connection     Symptom    The scanning function is unavailable  due to a lost connection with an external  controller or because connection  processing has not finished      Action   Check the connection with the external  controller     Touch  Close     A
129. e back side by design the machine does not print too close to the  edge  The top edge in particular needs 5 mm     1     of margin space   p 19  5 mm  3 1     wide area on the top edge  marked A  of the Glass Platen  or the ADF unit  cannot be scanned   regardless of enlargement or reduction settings     Placement of original document    Glass Platen     Top Side  p gt  Original  Bottom Side        Top  This area  5 mm  3 46   from the top edge   cannot be scanned     e Do not position the original within 5 mm  3 46   of the top edge  or the top edge of its printed image will be cut off   This 5 mm  3 146   margin will remain even in the    Max  Scan    setting      p 90   If the original document has no margin on its top edge  the top 5 mm     1     of its print will be cut off even when     Margin     is selected  Move the original about 5 mm  3 1     inwards from the top edge of the Glass Platen and  reduce the size     Enlarging Reducing Originals  Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto   Free   Zoom  61    Functions for Master Making    Enlargement and Reduction by Standard Ratio   Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto        1 Touch  Size  on the Master Making Note     Basic Screen     ONEMAN VE LCR VERGI  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast Size Paper           Multi Up D Feed  Print Check    e    Standard Ratio    and    Margin     can be selected  at the same time  The    Current    field will indi   cate the combined result of    Standard Ratio    x     Margin Plus Rate    when both are
130. e button to delete the current  name      Rename  ma x    scan_0001 8  ac   LILLJ LLL LIL  LIJbJLILILY WILL Lee  LJILJA JL LLJ  LJAL tte                                           Note   e You can also press the key to  delete    3  Touch the text button and enter the file name   p 135   4  Touch  OK    The file name is confirmed and the screen  returns to the Scan Basic Screen              190 Converting Hard copies to Stored Data  Scan Mode     2 Specifying a Directory    When saving in the USB Flash Drive  connect the  USB Flash Drive to the USB slot in advance   Note     e Ifthe machine is equipped with the optional  RISO Controller S300  you cannot specify  where to store the data     1  Touch the directry input box     OReady to scan data    Page No 1    Directory  1_folder               Basic Functions    Page A4  Contrast Size Format    Auto                  The Directory Screen appears     2  Touch  Storage Memory  or  USB Flash  Drive      Directory    Storage Memory       IB 5_folder      Non ID Print B 6_folder        Free Area  F77KB  90            If the USB Flash Drive is not connected    USB Flash Drive  is grayed out and not  available    3  Touch  ID Print  or  Non ID Print     ID Print  and  Non ID Print  are displayed  only when    Management Level    is set to     High Full Management       4  Touch the folder to save the data    5  Touch  OK    The    Directory    folder is confirmed and the  screen returns to the Scan Basic Screen     Note     e The fold
131. e master making process        A master is made according to the size of  paper placed on the Feed Tray  namely  the width of the Feed Tray Paper Guides  and the length of paper  If the size of paper  placed on the tray is smaller than the size  of the original  a master is not made for the  entire original  Set the same size of paper  on the tray as the original and perform the  master making operation        Troubleshooting 245       246    Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action       Vertical blank lines are found  on printed copies     The Thermal Print Head of the Master  Making Unit or the Scanner Glass of  Auto Document Feeder has been  stained with dirt  white out  etc     Gently wipe the Thermal Print Head or  Scanner Glass with a soft cloth    p 216       The unwanted background of  an original is picked up on  copies        If newspaper or colored paper is used  as an original  the background is  picked up in the copies     Lighten the    Contrast    and create a new  master   p 60       Dirt is found on printed copies     The Glass Platen  and or the ADF  Scanner Glass  is not clean     Clean the Glass Platen  and or the ADF  Scanner Glass   p 216       The edges of printed copies  are smudged with Ink        Larger size of paper than the original  was placed on the Paper Feed Tray  at the time of the master making  process        Did you use  Max  Scan  setting  when making the master     Because a master was made according to  a larger size th
132. e settings Note   have been saved  e To delete the current name  touch button  The name of each parameter can be changed for or press the key     your convenience  To change parameter names   proceed to the next step     Note    e After saving the settings  touch  Close  on the  Parameter List Screen to return to the Special  Paper Ctrl Screen    Touch  Close  on the Special Paper Ctrl Screen  to return to the Functions Screen  Printing will 1 1 Touch  Close     be done with the saved settings  Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl Screen   If you do not wish to print after saving the set   tings  press key on the control panel     10 Touch  OK  after entering all the  characters     Returns to the Parameter List Screen and the  name is updated     7 Touch  Rename      Parameter List       Select a Button Name to be Changed                   8 Touch the button to rename     Unregistered buttons are grayed out and are not  available     9 Touch character buttons to enter a  new name        Rename Cancel_J __OK__   HOOD Oooo             LJL DILL Le  LCJLJLJLJ GLI  HEIDI  WO             Change capitalization by selecting  Small  or   Capital  button    p 136       108 Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl     Functions for Printing    Retrieving Settings from the Parameter List       1 Touch  Special Paper Ctrl  on the 4 Touch the button to retrieve   Functions Screen  Unregistered buttons are grayed out and are not  
133. eccnsenecensieneensienseetsienecvesivaereneevaers 29  Scanner Glass oo    ee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeees 218  Scanning Contrast                ccccceeseeeeeeeteeees 60  167  Scanning Side  ADF                  cccseeeeeeeees 156  167  Selections Entry 0 0    ceceeceeeceeeeeereeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 176  Separation HOOK             ccccccecesseceessseeeeeeeees 219  231  Service Call Error            cccccccccccccceesssseeeeeeeees 222  223  Setting Data Information            ee eeeeeeeeeereeeees 190  Setting the Auto countrol Stacking Tray                39  Setting the Group to assign    n    123  Setting the Management Level    119  Setting the Paper Receiving Tray              eceee 37  Setting Up the Monthly Reminder                     162  Silent ck  2h EN ETE E E See oe ee 98  Single Page Mode    o   on 129  132  Size and Weight Restrictions                 00 16  18  Skip Pa   n eerste 32  55  Software Installation            cc eeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 15  Special Paper Ctrl              cc cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeees 105  Specifications              ccceeccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 257  Speed  print speed              eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 96  Standard Ratio  0        cccceccccccccecessssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 61  62  Start Key ocana ei er a e E aS 25  Start Up Screen    s sssssssseessesneesnnernnernnennnrennrennrennnne 26  St  l   sAr A a tet ete Re 31  32  Stock Management             ecceeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 171  SLOP KOY  airetan a e
134. eceessssceeceeeeceessseeeeeeeeess 193  Idling  Action    20 eee oii de 149  MI  eeeeesrecreesr eee een ce E eer er ec rere re 58  Image Processing             cescceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 167  Image Processing Mode              cceccecceereeereeereeeees 58  Initial Screen ooo    eeeececccceeeeesssceeeeeeecessssseeeeeeeens 26  OK cache seta a ee ee fue ede 207  214  INK Cartridge               cccceeeceeeeceeeeteeeeeeeees 21  207  214  Ink Cartridge Cap Holder                    0e 21  208  INK    Handling  oeeie ieatit cele ee Eaa 13  Ink Information Input                   cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241  INK SAVING a e A cect  Hee pete eee ly 70  Installation 20 0    cceeeeccccceceesssssceeeeeeeeessssseeeeeeeens 10  Installation Error            ccccccccccssssseeeeeeeeeesees 222  226  Installation Location 2 0 0 0    ccc ceeeeecccceeeeeeseteeeeeeeeees 10  a      gt   eee EE E EE 104  Irregular Fitter e oraraa 168  J   Jam EMOL Isine i 222  JOD vente Se ee 32  Job list display      eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeserenee 167  JOB  BIEI ESTRET 1 q DEEA E EEE aE e AEE 52  Job Memory                 eeee 140  141  142  144  146  Job Operation Area            eccceeeceeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeteeeeaes 32  Job Properties Area            eccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32  Job Separation              cceccceeeceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteees 168  JOb Separator    ccccccccsccecssseeeeessseeeeees 131  256  Jump Wing Control                  eeeeee 105  106  168    Index    K   Key Card Count
135. ed paper              ADF Original Release Lever       Original Release Dial         rae                           Troubleshooting       Troubleshooting       Problem Possible Cause Action          Paper gets jammed in the Auto   Paper is caught in the Auto Document   Removing originals jammed in the  Document Feeder DX 1 Feeder DX 1  document carrier    option   Open the ADF cover   Q     and raise the  feed roller as shown in                                 Important     e Take care not to touch the roller inside  the unit  It may cause smudges on the  original or a paper jam     Removing originals jammed in the  document carrier   Open the ADF cover   Q     and raise the  feed roller as shown in           Open the inside cover       and pull out  the original          C     Y                               Troubleshooting 249    Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action        option      Paper gets jammed in the Auto  Document Feeder DX 1    There is any paper caught in the Auto  Document Feeder DX 1     Removing originals jammed in the  original reversal unit   Open the auto document feeder cover        and raise the document tray as  shown in           Pull out the original                          Removing originals jammed in the  original receiving unit   Lift the Platen Cover Pad up         and pull  the release lever toward you         and  pull out the original                        Tray        Printed copies are not neatly  aligned in the Paper Rec
136. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaes 64  Using Custom Sized Paper  Paper                    ccccccccccccecceeeeeneeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeessseeesess 65  Automatic Printing  Auto Process  ais isliiaschusectccavsrasscata qsedentsarnde sdisaveedeaanne nie adosaetuonins tues 66  Processing Photos with Dot Screen  Dot Process                        cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeees 67  Adjusting Photo Contrast  Contrast Adj                  ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee rere ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeees 68  Adjusting Photo Gradation  Tone Curve               c ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeenaaaeeeeees 69  Saving Ink  MK SAVING  ase aeee cease Beads ecee seer onc dec ace see eas eae eee gave te can cecnctenededacea eas Eniri aias 70  Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print               eee 71  Original Orientation and Print Results  0           cccccceceeseeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeseeas 72  Margit seis e ea ea a avd ena seperti seve aee Aa ap PAE A ei Eaa E Eaa Ek 74  Orientation    of  Print Papen sc  eeen a a E ear a ease E a ee a aE a ire ele 74  Multi Up Interval  iniit eaae e ea adena de ea EN Nerea eed 74  2 Up  Operaatio Nei a la nda a E ON esol ean et real E a  75  Operation for Multi Up Printing   20 0 2         cccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeececeeeeeeeeseceeeceeeeeeesceeeeeeeeesenieeeesesseeas 76  Operation for Multi Up Tickets    0           ccccccceeseeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeseeaeaeeeeeeeeceeeeeesesesneeaeeeeeseenaees 7
137. eeeeeseeceieeeeeeeesnaas 12  Machine Handlingar a a a otertvereh peace ules al a a Oa aa A LE EEE Aa aE acne 12  USB Flash Drive itsa e eaaa nerea Aaaa Aa ENE ee oaea EAEN eaaa EE aaa 13  CONSUMADIOS E E A 13  Ink  FandlinG Asrin a A E a a Nara EE a E 13  Location of Caution Label               cccccceccceceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeesesueeaeeeeseeeneeees 13  Connection with a Computer                 cccccccceecccceceeeeeessseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaneeaaasseeesseeeeeeeeeess 14  Connection MEthO om  jist aeoe nn A date esate tale deities N ee e ia 14  Software  Installation ivi  denies tol eh ie a A oan 15  Paper Recommendations ni caen mi nciviienelnlainwian aun lean dheematte 16  Size and Weight ReStrictionS               ccccccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeesesaeaeeeeeeseenaeaees 16  Tips for Better Paper Feeding              ccccccccscccceeceeeeneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeseceeeeeeeeeseqcnneeeeesseneneeeeeess 17  Storing Environment tee aia eaa a aa Ea stews aaa Mandi aira EGEN EEEN 17  INAS se E A E E E A EE 18  Size and Weight ReStrictionS              cccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeesesisaeeeeeeeesneaees 18  Maximum Printing Areas and MarQins                c  cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeecccenesaeaaaeeeaneeas 19  Materials Not to Be Printed    cece cece crete ee ece et ecceeeeaaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeteeeeeeeneaaaes 19  Getting Acquainted 20  Funevonrand Name of Each Panteoia E a do nsiene aes 2
138. een appears     OLEA CRVELCRIENCH  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast Size Paper           _       Multi Up D Feed  Print Check     Gy Black          Note     e When you see  Data Map  in the Status Area   the machine is busy receiving electronic data  from the computer  Please wait a moment     5 Place the original     Place the original on the Glass Platen or in the  optional ADF  Auto Document Feeder  unit   To place the original  see    p 41     Printing from a Paper Document or Book 43    Basic Operations    6 Configure print functions     OCCA CR EL CEE CH  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast Size Paper           in     Multi Up D Feed  Print Check                           ace    In the Master Making Basic Screen  select func   tions as needed     Note    The following selections are available      Auto Process   p 66    e Image  Image Processing mode    p 58   Scanning Contrast   p 60    Size  Enlargement Reduction    p 61   Paper   p 65    Program   p 129    Job Memory   p 140    Dot Process     p 67    Contrast Adj    p 68    Tone Curve   p 69    Ink Saving   p 70    2 Up Multi Up Print   p 71    Layout   p 80    Book Shadow   p 84    Top Margin   p 87    Binding margin   p 88    Preview   p 92    D Feed Check     p 103    Interval   p 104    Jump Wing Control   p 106    Receive Tray   p 112    Special Paper Ctrl   p 105    Max  Scan   p 90    Output reversal   p 153    ADF Semi Auto      p 155    This setting is available when the ADF unit   option  is installed    Idling Action 
139. eeneneeeeeess 41  When placing in the ADF unit  Option                 cecccceceeceeeeeeeeeeceeteeeeeeeeeesesneaeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeess 41  Printing from a Paper Document or BOOK       ssssssssssseseseeerererrrrrrrrrssssssssrrrtrrrrerrrrrrrreneeeen 43  Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List                ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 48  Printing Computer Data  Direct Print               ccccccceccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeesesneeseeeesensnaeeees 50  Printing USB Data  USB Job List               ccceccescceceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeesesneeseeesseesneees 53  Changing Output Directions               cccceccescceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeeeas 55  Changing  Stop TIMING assesi e aa aa a e aaa aaea Mas aa a aata eh coeaetintes 57  Functions for Master Making 58  Selecting Image Processing Mode  lmage                cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 58  Selecting Scanning Contrast for the Original  Contrast                   ccs seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60  Enlarging Reducing Originals  Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto   Free   Zoom                 61  Enlargement and Reduction by Standard Ratio   Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto               cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeesneaeeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeesneeaees 62  Enlargement Reduction of a Changed Aspect Ration  Free                    cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 63  Enlarging and Reducing with the Zoom Function  ZOOM                ccccecceeee
140. eeteeeeeeeeeseeees 233  White  Sh Gt asco i ei ee 218  Wide Stacking Tray           cecceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256  Z   LOOM R AE AEE EA ah ea OS 61  64    265    266 056 36003 001    
141. eiving    The positions of the Receiving Tray  Paper Guides and the Paper Stopper  are inappropriate     Adjust the Receiving Tray Paper Guides  and the Paper Stopper to the size of  paper  For thick paper  slightly widen them  as necessary    If you have adjusted the horizontal  position on the Paper Feed Tray  shift the  Receiving Tray Paper Guides in the same  direction    p 37       The Paper Arrangers are not properly  set     Set the Paper Arrangers properly   p 37          The Paper Feed Pressure  Adjustment Lever is positioned  incorrectly        If the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment  Lever is set to    Thick Paper     printed  copies may not be correctly aligned when  using standard paper    Set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment  Lever to    Standard       p 34       250 Troubleshooting       Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action       Paper goes over the receiving    tray stopper     Follow the steps to level the receiving tray  as follows     1  Fold the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides Stopper     2  Lift up the sides of the receiving tray  with both hands  and move the  receiving tray shaft to position B   Position A is recommended in most  cases                       A  Ordinary position  B  Move to this position when paper  goes over the tray        Paper is not smoothly fed from    the Paper Feed Tray    skipped paper  or multiple     sheet feeding     The print paper is inappropriate     Use paper that falls within the  recommended range    p
142. ely  press the key to  print     When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key or  the Ge  key to clear         Close Platen Cover    If original moves  you may not get  desired result           Symptom    The Platen Cover was opened during  the editing process of the RISO Editor  function      Action   Close the Platen Cover gently        When the Platen Cover is closed  the  warning message is erased    Touch  Close      Alternatively  press the key or the    key to clear         234 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message       Enter Print Quantity Over  N    Programed Minimum Value     Symptom    You are trying to print fewer copies than  previously specified on    Minimum Print  Quantity         Action   Enter a larger number to print  or change     Minimum Print Quantity    on the Admin   Screen   p 171    Touch  Close   and specify the number  of copies higher than the number  displayed on the message           Images may not fit   in Frame of Paper with  This Reproduction Size     Check Current Selection     Symptom   Reproduction size for the detected  original size is larger than paper size     When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue       Alternatively  press the key to  print          Action    When stopping the print job   Modify the reproduction size  Touch  Cancel    p 61  Alternatively  press the key or  the key to clear    Invalid Print Drum  Symptom  
143. ent M C      touch each button     3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Register Screen      Limit    is updated     Setting Up User Management  User Management  123    Advanced Features      Disabling User identification access    Touch  Disable  on the Register Screen  to turn it    ON        Register       Rename J User 01 Input the PIN code  Group J G 1  Limit   ON    Disable l  0N     1 8 digits        User identification access is disabled and the user can    not use the machine    Note    To inactivate    Disable     touch  Disable  to turn it      OFF       e On the Register Screen for the administrator  a  Dis   able  button is not available     124 Setting Up User Management  User Management        Advanced Features    Changing Administrator User Registration       1 Display the User Management 4 Touch the User Button to change   Screen     Follow steps 1 to 4 in    Selecting Recognition and  Identification System      p 117     Create User    Select a Button to be Changed    2 Touch  Create User      User Management          Select management level    Management Level    High Full Management    Input user and group information    Reset all h     recognition method    Reset Counter Recognized by f             Registered buttons are displayed with a solid line   Unregistered buttons are grayed out and are not  available        5 Change various settings     Follow steps 4 to 5 in    Basic operation for register   3 Touch  Change   ing administrator users      p 120      6 
144. er  driver settings    Skip to step 6 if you are printing in Full Auto        5 Perform printing from the control  panel     The displayed screen and operation procedure  differ depending on the    Auto Process     Basic  tab  setting of the printer driver      Printing with Pause before    Master       The Master Making Basic Screen in step 2  is  paused depending on the use of the machine or  Admin  settings  In this case  press the key     1  Touch  Pause      OCCU VA ORV ELC ER CH    Cont rast Size    Page  A4        Multi Up D Feed  Print Check      1    Black       The Job List Screen is displayed     50 Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List     2  Touch  Output    If you want to operate the ID print  touch   ID Print Job    p 52  p 193    Job List     Pause  Owner Cys  Page       Document_1 doc RISO 100 10     Waiting Job s    Document_2 doc RISO    Document_3 doc RISO 5 2 5       The following screen appears     OREU AOR ELGER GI  Basic     Document_1 doc   P  1 2 Paper      Owner  RISO Preview  Date amp Time  Nov25 XX 05 30 E    Format  A4 Skip Page    Clear All J    Process   Auto process    OFF       J   Sepa        Black          3  Press the key     After making a master  start printing       Printing with Pause before    Print       A master is made after receiving the data  The  machine stops after printing a proof copy     1  Check the proof copy and adjust the set   tings as needed     2  Press the key     Printing starts       Printing w
145. er  pcchet 256  L   LAYOUL  AT 80  Lintitiesc lt  s2cn thie cece See cee Aiea  123  DING esti E ton Soe ti orate E Oh cles Tole te Oh rhe ne 58  Location of Caution Label              cc eceeeceeeseeeee 13  Low Admin tab only                  ceeseeeeterees 114 115  M   Machine Handling            cceeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12  Maintenance seiat iaoa leinas 216  Maintenance Call             ccccccccccccecesssssseeeeeesssneeeees 232  Management Level                  5  114  115  119  171  Ma  rgiM Eia iee e aeae a eer 61  62  Margin Plus Rate           ceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeneeeteeeeens 169  MAGIA ao E A A A ENTRAS 19  Master EELE eo 215  Master COPE         ceccccccccceccessssceeeceeeeeesstneeeess 205  214  Master Disposal BOX              ccccsccceeesseeesteeees 20  209  Master Disposal Box Handle                        209  Master Guide Flap             ccccceccsscceesseeeseeees 21  205  Master Information Input                     eeeeeeeeees 242  Master Jam Error o          cccessscccceeceesssscceeeeessssseeees 223  Master Making Unit         0    0 eeeeeeereeeee 21  204  Master Making Unit Cover                  eeee 21  204  Master Making Unit Cover Lever               eee 204  Master Making Unit Handle                    26  21  204  Master Making Unit Release Button              21  204  Master Replacement                  ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 204  Master Roll s iranerne 21  Master Roll Holder                  ccccccsssssseeeeeeees 21  205  Master Making Key
146. er Driver User   s Guide for further details about sending data and other settings     48 Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List     Basic Operations    Auto Process and Stop Timing    Auto Process is a combined automated steps of receiving data from the computer  making a master  and printing   To activate    Process     open the printer properties dialog box on the computer and select    Auto process      A proof  copy will not be printed     During each process  in order to adjust settings or to change paper  you can stop the operation    To temporarily halt an operation during the creation of a master or during print process  select one of the following  three options for    Process    in the printer properties dialog box     e Pause before    Master     Halts the operation before master making   To change settings  to change paper and to change Print Drum  Cylinder   e Pause before    Print     Halts the operation before printing   To print proof  to adjust Ink density  to adjust positioning and to change printing speed  Auto process    OFF     Stops twice  before making a master  and again before printing                                                                                               Receive data Stop before Master Making Stop before Printing  from computer   making a master printing  Auto process    ON             Pause before Yes         Master     Pause before    Print        Yes  Auto process    OFF    Yes Yes  Note   e The timing f
147. er name of the    Directory    folder of  storage data can be changed in    Admin         p 168     Specifying an Owner     1  Touch the owner input box     OReady to scan data    Page No 1    Directory 2_folder               Basic    Page A4  Contrast Size Form         Auto a    Book  Preview   Shadow      The Owner Screen appears   2  Touch the button of the owner to set                 OReady to scan data    Owner    Owner 1 Owner 5   Owner 2 Owner 6  a Owner 7  Owner 4 Owner 8     stain      The owner name is confirmed and the screen  returns to the Scan Basic Screen                                Storing Original Data and Use Method    Tip   Changing the Owner Name  1  Touch  Rename  on the Owner Screen     OReady to scan data    EL Owner       PJ Owner 6       Owner 3 Owner 7    Owner 4   Owner 8  E    Touch the button of the owner to rename   The Rename Screen appears     2  Touch the button to delete the current  name     3  Enter the Owner name   4  Touch  OK       Rename Coa    riso 28_     lt 2    E LJ   OOOO ooo  OOO OOO  HOO OW  OOOO oe  OBO OOo    The owner name is confirmed and the screen  returns to the Owner Screen                                         Converting Hard copies to Stored Data  Scan Mode  191    Storing Original Data and Use Method    Specifying Stored Size       Specify the size to save the scanned original    It is necessary to set the Format size when    e you place the originals on the Glass Platen   e you set the custom sized originals in 
148. essssn    Tr    els 4 2                      Set the original face up    The side of the original that is read can be specified  For  details about the settings  refer to  p 156   Important      e The placeable original size of 105 mm x 128 mm   41 3  x 51 30   and above     42 Placing the original    Basic Operations    Printing from a Paper Document or Book    The steps for scanning an original for printing is explained below     1 Make sure the machine is ON   Check the Control Panel     Note       When the power is OFF  both the Display and  the key are off  Turn the power ON    e Ifthe key is lit  the machine is in Energy  Saving mode  Press the key to cancel  Energy Saving mode     2 Check for printing paper     Make sure the paper is loaded    To load or to change the paper  see the following page   p 37   After replacing with paper of a different size   adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides and Paper Stopper    p 36    3 Check the Display       When the Recognition Screen is  displayed   Follow the message on the screen   For details  see   p 114   The initial screen will be displayed after the  user has been identified       When the initial screen is displayed  Proceed to step 4   The initial screen differs depending on the set   ting of    Display Priority    of    Admin             4 Touch  MasterMake  on the Opera   tion Selection Screen     Select an Operation Mode    RISO SE9380A         MasterMake    cal       v    The Master Making Basic Scr
149. et for user identification access   We recommend that you record which USB Flash Drives you distribute to which user   Distribute to each user a registered USB Flash Drive and a user registration number  ID    Rename  Group  User groups can be set   Limit  The upper limit of the copies masters can be set   Disable  User identification access can be enabled or disabled   Registered settings can be changed or cleared   In order to register users or operate other settings in User Management  the administrator must be registered in  advance  The User Management functions are activated after registering the administrator     Rename Group   p 127   Set a group name when operating group management   Up to 32 groups can be registered       Reset Counter  7 p 128     Clear the usage counters of all users and groups     Operation flow of User Management       We recommend that you set up User Management in following order                    Select the Select the mp   Create User  Recognized by Management  Administrator   Level          Create User     User              2         Setting      the Rename  Group        Set when you want to count user usage by group using    ID Counter Report     See   p 160     116 Setting Up User Management  User Management     Advanced Features    Selecting Recognition and Identification System       Set the Recognition and Identification System using    Recognized by    in advance when setting up User Management     Important      e If    Recognized by
150. et on Auto Document Feeder DX 1     Book Shadow    function cannot be used     Note     e The upside when the original is set is    Front Side      The set original is scanned sequentially from the top     e Go to    Admin     and select    Scanning Side  ADF    to save a frequently used setting as the default    p 167    Front Side   gt  Simplex    Scans the front side of the original  and prints on one side   Original Printed Copies  Important      e If the    Top Margin    function is used  the setting     Front Side   gt  Sim   plex    must be used    gt       Back Side   gt  Simplex    Scans the back side of the original  and prints on one side   Original Printed Copies  Important      e When    Sorter    is set to ON     Back Side   gt  Simplex    is automatically  selected  Place the original face down    gt       Duplex   gt  Simplex   Scans both sides of the original and prints on one side  The front side o     is scanned first and then the back side     Setting Direction    and    Paging Original Printed Copies   Direction    of the original must be specified    Important     e The    Duplex   gt  Simplex    option is not available in    Program  Multi   Page Mode    Likewise  if    Duplex   gt  Simplex    is selected     Multi Page  Mode    is not available    Note     e If the original includes blank pages  these will also be scanned and included in copies        156 Selecting Scanning Sides When Using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Scanning Side  ADF     Advanced
151. etails  see    p 114     1 Connect the USB Flash Drive to the  computer     Note     If the Recognition and Identification System      Recognized by     is set to    USB Flash Drive    in  the    User Management     it is also convenient  for you to use the registered USB Flash Drive to  output the data     2 Set printing options from your com   puter screen     Use the USB flash via Printer Driver     Note     e Make sure to remove the checkmark from the     Collate    option in the Print dialog box     3 Click  OK  in the print dialog box     The data created on the computer is stored in the  USB Flash Drive     4 Make sure the machine is ON   Check the Control Panel     Note     e When the power is OFF  both the Display and  the key are off  Turn the power ON   p 34   Ifthe       key is lit  the machine is in the Energy  Saving mode  Press the     O key to cancel the  Energy Saving mode     5 Check for printing paper     Make sure paper is loaded    To load or to change the loaded paper  see follow   ing page    p 37   After replacing with paper of a different size   adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides and Paper Stopper    p 36       Connect the USB Flash Drive that  contains the original data to print to  the USB slot                    Important      e While processing the data  do not remove the  USB Flash Drive  This will cause data to disap   pear and the USB to malfunction     Note     If the    USB print  Auto Process     has been set  as the out
152. eversal  153    Advanced Features    6 Touch D     C Ready to scan data  lt Reverse gt   Page No  4    Page  A4  Contrast Size           63 Black Blocked j    The confirmation screen for master making is dis   played     7 Touch  Yes      The Master Making Basic Screen for storage data  is displayed  Various output instructions can be  changed    p 26    Note       To cancel output reversal without making a  master  touch  No   To return to the previous  step  touch   lt Back      8 Press the key     The master making starts from the last page  scanned  and Print Basic Screen for storage data  is displayed     9 Enter the print quantity using the  Print Quantity Keys     The entered quantity is displayed on the Print  Quantity Display     10 Press the key     Printing starts   Afterwards  repeat steps 8 to 10        154 Print the original from the last page  Output reversal     Advanced Features    Proof and Print   only when the ADF unit is installed    ADF Semi Auto     Selecting    Auto Process    with the optional ADF unit installed automatically performs the complete printing job  but  you cannot make proof copies  or any necessary adjustments of each master  To pause for check after printing a  proof copy of each master  select    ADF Semi Auto        Important     e Turn    Auto Process    OFF when using    ADF Semi Auto        p 66   Note        The default    ADF Semi Auto    can be set on the Admin  Screen    p 168    Touch  ADF Semi Auto  on the Func   tions Screen
153. everse side of the next paper   Either change the paper or try    Ink Saving     or    Interval    features    p 70   p 104       Printed images are faint   Printed texts are blurred     If the machine is not used for an  extended period of time  Ink on the  surface of the Print Drum  Cylinder   may dry  This results in faint or  blurred printing just after printing  starts     The Ink on the Print Drum  Cylinder  will  dry when the machine is not in use for an  extended period  Printing with dried Ink  will produce light or faded copies    Press the  lt  Br  key and make several  copies before making copies to be actually  used  Or use the    Idling Action       p 149       Faint originals result in faint images     Increase the scanning level and perform  the master making operation again   p 60   For originals written with a pencil  select  the Pencil mode    p 58       If the temperature is low  below 15  C   59  F   in a place where the machine  is installed or Ink Cartridges are  stored  Ink does not flow smoothly     Use the machine after keeping it at room  temperature for a while   p 10       The Ink Saving mode has been set     With the    Ink Saving    mode selected  the  Ink on printed copies is fainter than usual   p 70          The position of printed text is  shifted to the left or right     The left right position control was not  set to    Center    when the document  was printed     First lower the Paper Feed Tray  then  adjust the position and print a proof
154. evice Area    Displays when an optional device is attached   Touch to activate     Note    e When no optional device is attached     High Speed     button is displayed    Status Area    Displays the current status of the machine   This area shows the same information as that on the       Printing from a paper Document    Screen   77 p 31     Frequently Used Buttons    0    Cancel    Close    zap    Activates Executes a setting     Cancels a setting    Closes the current window    Switches between the pages   Increases decreases selected values     numbers  location  etc     Scrolls through the screens     Getting Acquainted    Basic Process    Printing from a Paper Document       Master making process Printing process                            A placed original is scanned by the scanner  and a generated master is rolled around the Print Drum  Cylinder    After a while a proof copy is performed  After checking the print result  enter the number of copies to be printed and  start printing     Printing from a Computer Data       Master making process Printing process                         Transfer the original data created using a computer to the machine via a network or USB Flash Drive    The generated master is rolled around the Print Drum  Cylinder     After a while  a proof copy is performed  After checking the print result  enter the number of copies to be printed and  start printing     Basic Process 33    Basic Operations    Preparing to Print    First set up the Paper
155. ext master     The  6  icon is preferentially displayed in the mes   sage area even when  ECO mode  is set                    70 Saving Ink  Ink Saving     Functions for Master Making    Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet   2 Up   Multi Up Print        Multi Up    function prints multiple originals on one sheet      2Up  Prints two copies of the same original side by side on one sheet of paper     Multi Up Print  One or multiple originals  up to 4  can be printed on a single sheet of paper      Multi Up Print    has the following three types   e Single Original  A single original is printed multiple times   e Multiple Original  Multiple originals are printed multiple times   e Multi Up Tickets  You can print multiple long  thin custom originals such as tickets   Single Original and Multiple Original can print in quantities of 2  4  8 and 16 respectively     Important     e Use standard sized paper when using the    Multi Up    function  With custom size paper placed  you cannot per   form    Multi Up    printing even when the size is stored on the Admin  Screen    Note    e These functions cannot be used with the following functions       Auto 90  Rotation      Top Margin   Book Shadow       Binding margin       Size  Auto        Layout       Format  Auto   in Scanning Mode    Ink Saving  If you change the    Image    settings between originals in Multiple Original     Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print  71    Functions for Master Making    
156. ferent types of  initial screen        i       About the key       By pressing the Ww key  you can switch  between the  Mode Screen  and  Basic  Screen      p 30    26 Display    Getting Acquainted    Basic Screen Other Screens    e Touch  MasterMake  to display the Master   Selections Screen    Making Basic Screen  Quickly change the settings for a function or open    ONC OM EL CAEN its screen     Basie Y Selections Wf Functions J  Page A4  Contrast Size Paper          Ready to Make Master             Renew    Page  ca  Dons ee  ae  e Touch  Printing  to display the Print Basic Screen  Book    Shadow Job Memory  O Ready to Print    sete een i n    Functions Screen    SE omj Access to a variety of functions   4 A4  Om    Interval                                        High Speed      Le       OLEA OEGE G      D Feed  j Functions   Gy Black  ia rogram      Touch  Scanning  to display the Scan Basic sh ere    Screen  Dot Process   Cw id    Contrast Adj    OReady to scan data  File Name Owner  RM  folder    Admin  Screen    Page  B4  Contrast Size                                        Changes the default values of various functions                    O Ready to Make Master    Resets current settings  once opened        iode key Pattern    Mode Select   Ca   Pem  gt                 Note     e Depending upon the usage environment  some  of the    Admin     features may not be available      Admin     tab may not be displayed   Consult  your dealer  or authorized service  represen
157. for printing        If the storage data contains multiple pages  you can choose to output only odd or even pages  or indicate the  specific pages to print using    Output       p 196        The storage data also can be overlaid onto a hard copy original and printed    p 193    All users of this machine can use the 6 folders in    Storage Memory     It is convenient to store and use the data in  common with others     6 folders are created in each    USB Flash Drive     Use the folders as needed  when selecting a folder for storing any  specified data     Important      We cannot guarantee storage data or USB Flash Drive data against losses occured by accidents or unforeseen  events  We recommend that you use your computer to make back up copies of any important documents     Note     You can easily delete unnecessarily stored data when the remaining free space of the optional Document Storage  Card or USB Flash Drive is limited  The free space is displayed in the Storage Selection Screen or USB Job List  Screen    p 196    As to the folder for storing original data  6 folders are prepared for the optional Document Storage Card and 6 fold   ers are prepared for each memory in the case of USB Flash Drives  When you use folders to share data  you are  recommended to devise folder rules  e g  dividing the folders by department or type of data    Folder names of the optional Document Storage Card can be changed on the Admin  Screen     p 168    To change folder names of the USB Fl
158. from a computer   set    Auto Process    to  OFF  or  Pause before    Mas   ter                     Rotating the Original 180 Degrees to Make a Master  Rotate  91    Functions for Master Making    Checking the Print Image Prior to Making  Master  Preview     You can check what the actual master will look like by previewing an image of the scanned original or an image of  the data sent from a computer  This function is handy for checking the layout or final image of a Multi Up job   The operation and display timing differ depending upon the mode        Mode name   original type     When set    When to display    If    Auto Processing    is ON       Printing from the Original    When setting functions    After Scanning the    Scans the original  then        master making functions   related to Scanning  setting  from Functions     Original    Document related to Master Making Original temporarily stops to display   settings from Functions  the preview   Scan Mode When setting functions After Scanning the There is no  Auto Process     in scan mode  but if multiple  originals are placed in an  ADF unit  you can touch   Close  after viewing the  preview to start scanning the  next original        Printing Original Data  from a Computer    Stopping the print job prior to  making a master  Pause  before    Master    Auto   process    OFF      after the  machine has received the  original data    After  Preview  is  touched    A preview is not shown if  data is sent from the printer 
159. g Time     Energy Saving Mode    is not activated  Power is 1 99 mn  factory default is 5  turned ON OFF using the power switch  mn   e Auto Sleep  The machine is standing by to receive data from the  computer  but the rest of its functions are powered  off   e Auto Power OFF  Automatically shuts the power off   Data cannot be  received     System     Power OFF Schedule          Set a time of the day to automatically turn off the power OFF ON   to the machine  e Shut Off time  If the machine is in use  or receiving data  power will Hour  Minute  not shut off    ECO mode OFF ON    Operate the LCD panel brightness and printing  pressure at lower levels than when printing normally  and print with minimized power consumption    When    ECO mode    is set to    ON     the default values of     Print Speed    and    Print Density    cannot be changed   When the machine is set to ECO mode  the      ECO  mode    icon is displayed in the Message Area     Note    When using    ECO mode    in combination with any of  the following functions  display of the      ECO mode     icon is omitted     e    Ink Saving     e    Program    and    Output reversal     e    Program    and    Layout             170 Changing Default Settings  Admin         Advanced Features       Display Access  Button    Functions    Description           System     User Management  Set the User Management function     e Management Level  Set the    Management Level      e Create User  Register the administrator and u
160. gement  administrator user registration included    and return to the factory settings     Important      e Ifthe    Recognized by    setting is changed  all settings in User Management  including the administrator   s regis   tration  will be deleted  Set    Recognized by    first  then operate other settings          Management Level      p 119     Select the Management Level from among 3 levels    High Full Management  Users require identifying themselves when operating the machine and when the ID Print is output   Mid ID Print Only  Users require identifying themselves when the ID Print is output    Low Admin tab only  Manages the users without any use of security features  Users don t require identifying them   selves when operating the machine and cannot perform ID print  This level allows only the administrator to change  the  Admin   settings    For details  see the table of  p 114     Setting Up User Management  User Management     115    Advanced Features      Create User  7 p 120     Register the administrator users   Up to 100 users  administrator included  can be registered   Set following options when registering   e PIN Code or USB Flash Drive  PIN Code  A PIN Code can be set for user identification access   We recommend that you prepare a list of the registered users and record the user registration numbers  ID  and  PIN Codes for each user   Notify each user about the set PIN Code and user registration number  ID    USB Flash Drive  A USB Flash Drive can be s
161. gress status     1  Master Making                   pot pot Indicator         2  Master Making  1 2 3 4 Stop Bar    3  Print Indicator  4  Printing Stop Bar    Ready to make a master  Auto ON   when 1 is lightening   Ready to make a master  when 1 2 are lightening   Ready to print  when 3 4 are lightening   The indicator increases one bar at a time from the left    indicating the progress of the current master making or   printing job    e Indicator 1 or 3 blinks during the master making print   ing operation       Ifa master making or printing job is halted  the    progress bar stays lit at that position   Ready to  resume        Control Panel 25    Getting Acquainted  Display    The Screens and their Various Stages       When the power is turned on  after a brief display of the Start up Screen  the initial screen appears        Power ON Mode Screen  v Initial Screen  Ex    Start Up Screen  Ex   Select an Operation Mode    RISO SE9380A    Q    MasterMake    Do Not Set Original Yet             When the optional Document Storage Card or  USB Flash Drive is attached          Note    Start Up Screen settings   Select  Start Up Screen  on the Admin   Screen     Select an Operation Mode          RISO SE9380A    Initial screen settings  You can select  Mode Screen    RISO  Print  or  Scanning  as the initial screen to    best suit your needs  MasterMake Scanning  Select  Display Priority  on the Admin       Screen     Refer to the following pages for more  information about the dif
162. h sides of originals  will be scanned by the  ADF                  Duplex   gt  Simplex       Setting Direction Paging Direction    KIJ  Align Top Left   Right  kK AJ Align Side EA Top   Bottom          D    See  p 156 for details of scanning options     3 Touch  OK         Scanning Side  ADF Cancel_J __OK__   Front Side   gt  Simplex   Duplex   gt  sird        SS    3   Back Side   gt  Simplex      Both sides of originals  will be scanned by the  ADF                       Duplex   gt  Simplex       Setting Direction    k   Align Top  k A  Align Side    Paging Direction    GS Left   Right  KA Top   Bottom          Returns to the Basic Screen after the    Scanning  Side  ADF    settings have been saved     Note     e To confirm the current    Scanning Side  ADF     settings  open the    Scanning Side  ADF     Screen once more    The selected settings buttons are highlighted     158 Selecting Scanning Sides When Using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Scanning Side  ADF     Advanced Features    Tip  5  Select  Back Side   gt  Simplex  for printing   Scanning duplex originals for manual duplex  printing Printing Paper    With the optional Auto Document Feeder DX 1   the buttons on the    Scanning Side  ADF    Screen  can be used to scan both sides of an original and  print on both sides of paper    e g   Scanning the duplex original for duplex print   ing    1  Set the original for duplex printing          Original orientation       Output    3  Place the printing paper face down i
163. he Print Image Prior to Making Master  Preview  95    Functions for Printing    Changing the Print Speed     Print Speed Adjustment     You can select the print speed from five levels  from 60 to 130 sheets minute     You can adjust the print speed while printing is in progress     Note     p 98  Set the default print speed on the Admin  Screen     In cases where printing noise is excessive  decrease the print speed or use    Silent    mode     The factory default is level 3  approximately 100 sheets minute        p 167     p 167  Print Speed    p 167  Print Density        Press the or  gt   key to adjust the  print speed              SPEED   gt  Hoo  SLOW 1 2 3 4 5 FAST                                  onon ol er  Aww      EI CDIP                 1  Print Speed Indicator  Shows the current print speed     2     gt   Key    Increases the print speed incrementally     3  G key  Decreases the print speed incrementally     96 Changing the Print Speed  Print Speed Adjustment     When  ECO mode  is set  the default print speed is    3     You can adjust the print speed when the ECO mode is set     Indicator level and print speed       Indicator 1 2 3 4 5  Level       Print Approx    Approx    Approx    Approx    Approx   Speed 60 80 100 120 130   sheets                       minute           Note   e The Functions Screen has a    High Speed    function    for faster printing   p 97       Functions for Printing    Printing at High Speed  High Speed     By using    High Speed     yo
164. he label on the Ink Cartridge outlet  surface contains information needed for  printing  If the machine cannot read the  information  it does not operate    Set an Ink Cartridge that is specific to the  machine and that is with label attachment  and free from dirt        226 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting       Message    Possible Cause    Action       Wrong type Master Installed   or Cannot Read Master Info  Replace Master Roll   or Contact dealer  or authorized  service representative  Riso office    Incorrect type of master is  installed     Set a correct Master Roll   p 204    Important      e Use a Master Roll specifically designed  and approved for use with this machine   Failure to do so may cause problems or  damage to the machine        The  i  section on the master  core is missing  or it has worn  off  or it has been tilted     The W W section on the master core  contains information needed for making  masters    If the machine cannot read the  information  it does not operate  Set a  dedicated Master Roll that has the     mark and is free from wear and tilt           Wrong Type Print Drum  Cylinder   Installed  Replace with Correct Type       Incorrect Print Drum  Cylinder   is installed        Install a correct Print Drum  Cylinder    p 211    Important      e Use a Print Drum  Cylinder  specifically  designed and approved for use with this  machine  Failure to do so may cause  problems or damage to the machine        When a Message Displays 227   
165. he power ON while removing or replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder    e Make sure to place the changed Print Drum  Cylinder  into the Print Drum  Cylinder  case and store horizontally     Removing the Print Drum  Cylinder        1 Open the Front Cover  3 Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder            Print D   gt   Gres NEOPA    Handle                                  Grasp the Print Drum  Cylinder  Handle and    Check that the indicator of the Print slowly pull until the Print Drum  Cylinder  is com   Drum  Cylinder  Release Button is pletely extended   ON     4 Remove the Print Drum  Cylinder                        Firmly grasp  the Green Handle       Print Drum  Cylinder   Release Button    y   J    If the indicator is off  press the Print Drum  Cylin   der  Release Button to turn it on                                         Use both hands to lift the Print Drum  Cylinder     Important   straight up to remove from the rail   e When the Master Making Unit is out  the Print Proceed with replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder    Drum  Cylinder  cannot be pulled out  Return removing the paper jam  etc      the Master Making Unit into position and press  the Print Drum  Cylinder  Release button    p 204       Replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder  211    Replacing Consumables    A Caution        Do not touch the connector on the Print Drum   Cylinder    Neglecting this may result in malfunction of the  Print Drum  Cylinder  because of static electric   ity or other factors               
166. her  a  or YJ to specify the pages     Copy Move    USB Flash Drive    B 1_usb_folder    B 2_usb_folder  B 3_usb_folder            Free Area  77 7KB  90         6  Clear       l Cancel   Retrieve     Storage Retrieve       OK                    Touch  OK  to delete the data     Preview    Display the Preview Screen of the enlarged thumbnail   p 92    7     196 Retrieving Stored Data and Printing  Storage Memory  USB Job List     Storing Original Data and Use Method    Overlaying Storage Data onto a Print Job   Overlay     You can overlay stored data onto a hard copy original   For example  this function can be used to overlay a stamp over multiple originals indicating    Sample        Important    e To use this function  the optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash Drive is required   e This function cannot be used with the following functions         Ink Saving       Top Margin       Binding Margin       Storage Memory     Overlay    images cannot be stored        When sending original data from the computer    1 Place an original  When overlaying data stored in the USB Flash  Drive  connect the USB Flash Drive to the USB    Place the original on Glass Platen or in ADF unit slot and touch  USB Job List       option    See the    Basic Operations    chapter for informa   tion on placing the original              Storage Selection    1  a2  as   e fos 6                                                                  Touch  Overlay  on the Functions    1_folder Free Area  9
167. ide the Paper Stopper to the edge of the Paper  Receiving Tray and fold in                       2  Pull up the Paper Arrangers  slide the Receiving  Tray Paper Guides to the left and right as far as  they will move and fold in                          3  Close the Paper Receiving Tray     38 Preparing to Print    Basic Operations    Setting up the Auto control Stacking Tray  Optional        1 Open the Auto control Stacking  Tray                          Pull the Auto control Stacking Tray down until it  comes to a rest     2 Raise the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides                          3 Raise the Paper Stopper     The Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper posi   tions are automatically adjusted for paper size  used                          Note     e The Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper    positions can be adjusted on the Touch Panel     p 112    Pressing the Receiving Tray Paper Guides   Opening Button during printing moves the  Receiving Tray Paper Guides for about   1 mm  3 g4   outward each time        4 Adjust the Paper Arrangers     hyf    Alignment of paper is affected by sizes and  strength of paper  Adjust the Paper Arrangers so  that printed paper is aligned    Press the Paper Arranger to push the plates out   pull up to pull them in                   For plain paper                         Press to open all of the four Paper Arrangers       For plain paper with images  lopsided on page                      Press to open the two Paper Arrangers on the  more hea
168. il drawings or lightly printed doc  Ughter Select fo print cut and past   Penet pe 9 or Hay p drawings wih shadows                60 Selecting Image Processing Mode  Image        Selecting Image Processing Mode  Image  61             1  Chapter Title 3  Display  2  Operation Procedure Shows the screen as seen at each step     The operational procedures are outlined in steps  Follow  these steps     About the content of this manual and the illustrations  e The illustrations included in this document depict the SE9380A model in most cases     e Displays are illustrated as if currently activated  Some buttons mentioned in this manual may not be available in  default setting  or when the optional device is not installed     The optional Auto Document Feeder AF VI II and Auto Document Feeder DX 1 are collectively described as the     ADF unit        In this manual  the optional memory card DM128 CF and memory card DM512 CF are collectively described as  the  memory card      Important      e Measurements in the text body will be shown in both metric and inch  imperial  formats  but diagrams will show only  metric measurements        Icons Used in This Manual    9    Before Starting to Use    Safety Guide   Installation    This section describes the precautions to be observed when installing the machine  Read this section before install   ing the machine     Note     e Your dealer  or authorized service representative  will help you to determine a proper location for the machine at
169. ing  Book  10 kg  22 Ib  or less   sheet    When using the Glass Platen    50 mm x 90 mm  131 32  x 317 39     310 mm x 432 mm  127 32  x 17    When using the Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  option     100 mm x 148 mm  315 46  x 513 46     310 mm x 432 mm  127 32  x 17    When using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  option     105 mm x 128 mm  41 8  x 51 32     297 mm x 432 mm  1114 46  x 17      When using the Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  option    50 g m   13 lb bond    128 g m   34 Ib bond    When using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  option    Single sided feeding    40 g m2  11 Ib bond    128 g m2  34 Ib bond   Duplex sided feeding    52 g m   14 lb bond    105 g m   28 Ib bond     100 mm x 148 mm  315 46  x 513 46     320 mm x 432 mm   1219 32  x 17      Paper up to 555 mm  21 27 32   from top to bottom may be used in the Extended  Paper mode     Approx  1000 sheets  64 g m   17 lb bond    80 g m   21 lb bond      Maximum Height 110 mm  4 11 32      Approx  1000 sheets  64 g m   17 lb bond    80 g m   21 lb bond      Maximum Height 110 mm  4 11 39      46 g m   12 Ib bond    210 g m   110 Ib index     Line  Photo  Standard Portrait Group   Duo  Line Photo Shadow off    Pencil  Darker Lighter     Approx  19 seconds  for Letter short edge feed 100  reproduction ratio   Approx  16 seconds  for Letter long edge feed 100  reproduction ratio     291 mm x 425 mm  1115 32  x 1623 32      Zoom  50   200    Standard reproduction ratio  enlargement   200   154   129   121   Standard 
170. ing Default Settings  Admin      You can modify the Default Settings to best suit your needs   You can edit them as needed   Important      If the administrator is registered in User Management  only the administrator can change the  Admin   settings    This operation requires input of the administrator s PIN Code or connection of the registered USB Flash Drive     p 120    Depending on the usage environment  the    Admin     features may not be available  the    Admin     tab may not be dis   played     For details  consult your dealer  or authorized service representative     Note      The default settings are the values restored when the machine is turned ON or when the key is pressed     Configurable Functions       __ Initial settings  factory default     This function can be set only when the option is installed        Display Access Functions Description  Button       DirectAccess Entry  p 176  Store frequently used functions on the Basic Screen  for each mode        Selections Entry  p 176  Store frequently used functions on the Selections  Screen for each mode        Display Priority Mode Screen RISO Print   Select first screen to display following the Startup  Scanning  Note     e The Mode Screen is available only when    Mode Key  Pattern    is set to    Mode Selection            Display  Mode Key Pattern   Mode Selection Loop  Select screens to display when the key is  pressed      Mode Selection    Pressing the key will open the Mode Screen no  matter which scree
171. ing on the setting  on the scanning side     lt Front Side   gt  Simplex gt     40 g m  to 128 g m   11 Ib bond to 34 Ib bond    lt Back Side   gt  Simplex or Duplex   gt   Simplex gt    52 g m2 to 105 g m   14 Ib bond to 28 Ib bond          The paper weight limit differs depending on which sides of the original are scanned  Scanning sides can be speci   fied using    Scanning Side  ADF      p 156    e Originals are scanned according to the size of paper placed on the Paper Feed Tray when masters are made  Posi     tion the Feed Tray Paper Guides to the same width as the original     When the paper placed is smaller than the original  the entire original will not be scanned   When the placed paper is larger than an original  dirt on the glass or shade of the original  may result in unexpected  dirt in the area beyond the size of the original     e Bound originals can also be used on the Glass Platen   e You can automatically feed up to 50 original sheets 80 g m   21 Ib bond  when using the optional ADF  Auto Doc     ument Feeder  unit     Note     e Use the Glass Platen when printing the following originals         Patched or worn originals      Wrinkled  curled  folded  or torn originals      Transparent originals  such as tracing paper or OHP transparencies         Chemically treated originals  such as thermal or carbon paper         Originals with correction fluid or glue        Extremely thin originals  Using the optional Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  less than 50 g m2  
172. ing the retrieved job settings    Continue with the normal printing processes   Note       To cancel a retrieved job memory  press the    key     Tip    Quick Retrieval   A job setting can be retrieved via hardware keys  without touching the Touch Screen    For example  to retrieve and print job M 2  press    the        2      77 key in that order  M 2 is    retrieved and starts the master making process     Job Memory    Select a Button to be Retrieved    Rename  Clear       Registered Number       Advanced Features    Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory  145    Advanced Features    Clearing Job Memory       1 Touch  Job Memory  on the Func   tions Screen     ORECA ORUE CVEN       Selections Functions    Job We J Multi Up Print      Book Shadow      P  1 4                d                  2 Touch  Clear      Job Memory    Select a Button to be Cleared          Register M     Retrieve    Rename    Clear             3 Select a Job Memory to clear     Job Memory    Select a Button to be Cleared    Register g M 1    Retrieve 2   RISO NEWS    Rename          Clear             Important      e Make sure it is the job setting that you want to  delete     e Once deleted  it cannot be restored     146 Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory        4 Touch  OK             RISO NEWS  Clear 114                5 Touch  Close      Job Memory Close J    RISO NEWS  Cleared  fy                   Returns to the Functions Screen        Advanced Features    Protecting Confidential Documents 
173. int    MENS     Density Fine Adjustment     Consumables Information Input Wizard                         A confirmation screen displays when done     Consumables Information Input Wizard       Master Information Input    Confirm the input data shown below   Press the START key if those set values are OK        Item Value   H4  Master Density 1   H5  Print Density Fine Adjustment 1   H6  First Print Density Adjustment 1       Press the key to approve selection   Returns to the Basic Screen        When a Message Displays 243    Troubleshooting    Troubleshooting    If you run into a problem  consult the following chart first  to find answers before calling for a repair           Problem Possible Cause Action  The machine does not start up   You may have pressed the power Try pressing the power switch again   when the power switch is switch while the machine was in the   Before pressing the power switch  you  pressed  Sleep Mode  may want to find out whether the machine    is indeed in the Sleep Mode  by checking    activate the machine        Power has been disconnected    Check the power cord for proper  connection to both the machine and the  electrical outlet       Check the power breaker        The front cover is closed  but   The Front Cover has not been firmly   Completely close the Front Cover  The  the error message still does closed  magnetic latch should properly engage   not clear        The Paper Feed Tray cannot   The Feed Paper Tray Guides have Turn the power on a
174. isplayed     A Caution     When you insert a hand inside the machine to remove paper  etc   be careful not to touch protruding objects  or the edges of the plates  This may cause injury     Error Message Layout       A message and a troubleshooting illustration will be displayed in accordance with the message type to show how to  resolve the problem     1  Error Number  Error type and error ID number    2  Error Messages  Description of the error and actions to resolve the  Master Not Set in Place problem  Insert Lead Edge of Master into Master 2 3  Graphic Area  Entrance and Close Master Making Unit   P       Visually demonstrates how to resolve the problem    4  Counter Display  3 Touch to display the    Counter Display    window                Counter Display 4          Error Number Error Types Description Reference  page       Errors that require repair or inspection by a  authorized service representative    TO0 000 Service Call Error To resolve a Service Call Error  contact your dealer p 223   or authorized service representative  with the  error number           A00 000 Jam Error Displays when the master is jammed  etc   p 223  B00 000 Optional Device Displays when an error occurs on the optional  p 224  Error device        Displays when a consumable such as Ink or    C00 000 Consumable Error f  master roll is depleted     p 225       Displays when a part or unit is not properly    D00 000 Installation Error    installed       p 226                      222 When a Mess
175. istered   p 137    Choose from the following actions on the Print Basic Screen   Touch a button to proceed     O Ready to Print     Program A   003G 3      Basic    Print Position    High Speed                   S v  ancel Job   1  oom  cance Jo J     3  Black                          Renew Page   Creates a master from the last Master Making data    Next Page  or  Go to Next   Stops current print job  skips to the next original  set or group    Cancel Job   Cancels execution of the Program     Note     e The optional Job Separator is useful for Programed Printing   The Job Separator releases a piece of tape after each set or original document  thereby automatically separating  sets or groups  It eliminates the need to manually remove a stack of sheets or insert a marker between sets   Remember to activate    Job Separation    in the Functions Screen when printing with the Job Separator   You must remove each stack from the Paper Receiving Tray  or insert a marker during the pause if not using the  Job Separator     Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program  131    Advanced Features    Setting Up for Programed Printing       There are two ways to display the Program Screen     e Touch  Program  on the Functions Screen on the display   e Press the key of the Print Quantity Keys     The following steps describe pressing the key of the Print Quality Keys     1 Press the key  Enter the numbers using the Print  Quantity Keys       For Single Page Mode  OMe ai       Single Page Mode Ca
176. ith Auto process    OFF       1  Follow steps 1 to 3 in    Pause before    Mas   ter      Stop after making a master and printing a  proof copy    2  Check the proof copy and adjust the set   tings as needed     3  Press the key     Printing starts     Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List  51       Basic Operations    Note     If the data contains multiple pages  repeat the  same steps for each page     Entering the number of copies from the Print  Quantity Keys will override the number speci   fied in the Print dialog box     For    ID Print     printing starts with specified Auto  Process mode after recognition     To manually stop a job during master making or  printing operation  press the key  In master   making process  the machine will stop after the  master is made  In printing process  the  machine will stop printing    Press the key to resume the job     Remove the printed paper                    Open the Receiving Tray Paper Guides and  remove the paper     Note     e After printing is completed  the master remains  on the Print Drum  Cylinder   To protect confi   dential documents from unauthorized duplica   tion  use the Confidential feature to discard the  master after printing     p 147    Basic Operations          Tip   Job List Screen  Job List   Pause  Owner Cps  Page  Document_1 doc RISO 100 10    Clear    Output     Waiting Job s     Document_2 doc RISO 200 1  Document_3 doc RISO 50 2           File name only ID Print Job    Once the
177. ize    is updated     64 Enlarging Reducing Originals  Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto   Free   Zoom     Functions for Master Making    Using Custom Sized Paper  Paper     The machine automatically detects standard sized paper in the Paper Feed Tray to create master of correct size for  printing  However  because non standard paper sizes cannot be detected  they must be manually specified before a  master is made     Important        Custom paper size must be registered on the Admin  Screen  Failure to do so may make an incomplete master   p 178    Touch  Paper  on the Master Making  Basic Screen     ORECA ORVELA E RIGI  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast Size Paper        Auto  mmnm  100       Multi Up D Feed i  Print Check                        Paper Size    S St andard T    W150  lt H220 mm       W240  lt H300 mm  No Entry    No Entry          Important      e Previously recorded custom paper sizes are  displayed on this screen  Make sure to register  any custom sizes not displayed here prior to  use     p 178    Note   e Touch  Auto  to use standard size paper     3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen      Paper Size    is updated        Using Custom Sized Paper  Paper  65    Functions for Master Making    Automatic Printing  Auto Process     Master making and printing can be performed automatically in sequence    When    Auto Process    is selected  simply enter number of copies to print  then press the key   Note    e When printing is completed  Print Qua
178. ize  enlargement reduction    p 61  e Book Shadow   p 84   e Dot Process     p 67  e Layout   p 80   e Contrast Adj    p 68  e Scanning Side   ADF   p 158   e Tone Curve   p 69  e My Direct Access     p 164     The following functions are specific to scan mode   e Format   p 192     188 Converting Hard copies to Stored Data  Scan Mode     Storing Original Data and Use Method    Scanning a Hard copy Original       1 Place the original  Note   e You can check scanned data instantly by ena   bling the    Preview    function  You can also use  this function to check data before saving     Place the original on the Glass Platen or in the  optional ADF unit    To place the original  see p 41      See the previous section for the functions that    2  Select a scan mode  pan Be sek  Touch  Scanning  on the Mode Selection Screen  Important    p 26 e Set    Format    when scanning custom sized orig   The Scan Basic Screen is displayed  inals   p 192    Note       After selecting the Scan mode and if the follow   ing    Format    Screen is displayed  select the 5 Press the key   page size  original size  and touch  OK   The scan starts     Note     e After scanning the original  a preview shows on  the display if    Preview    is set   Check the image on the display and touch   Close      Format          Auto l B5 D    6 Repeat steps 1  4 and 5 if the original  has multiple pages     Note     e If multiple originals were placed on the optional  ADF unit  all originals will be scanned at
179. ize is automatically detected  When  the size display shows    Custom    even if stan   dard sized paper has been set  the Feed Tray  Paper Guides are not properly set against the  paper   Make sure that the Feed Tray Paper Guides fit  tightly against the paper   p 65                         Basic Operations    Preparing to Print 35    Basic Operations    Adding or Replacing Paper    When you add paper or replace with paper of a different size at the time of printing  press the Feed Tray Ascent    Descent Button to lower the Paper Feed Tray              Feed Tray Ascent        p Descent Button  e The Paper Feed Tray is lowered while you press and hold the button  and    when you release the button  the tray stops at that position    e When the tray runs out of paper or you remove all papers  the tray is automat   ically lowered to the bottom    e After paper has been replenished  the Paper Feed Tray automatically rises  when you press the Key on the Control Panel              Important      e When changing to a different paper size  remember to readjust the Receiving Tray Paper Guides and Paper Stop   per     e When changing to a different quality paper  remember to adjust the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever     Note     e When the Paper Feed Tray has been lowered to the bottom  if you press this button after paper has been replen   ished  the Paper Feed Tray rises     Closing the Paper Feed Tray    Before closing the Paper Feed Tray  remove the paper and widen the Feed 
180. l    can be set on the Admin  Screen  The factory default is 15 seconds   p 169    74 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print     Functions for Master Making    2 Up Operation       1 Set the original and print paper  3 Make necessary settings     Important   Afterwards  perform the same operation as the  normal master making and printing process    The reproduction size needs to be set according  to the combination of the original size and printing  paper size    Set the reproduction size by referring to the follow   ing tables     e Pay attention to the orientation of the original   For    2 Up     make sure to place the original as  the diagram demonstrates    The same is true when using the ADF unit           Original       A4 B5 A5 B6          A3 100    116    141    163                0 0 0 O   e Make sure to load paper as shown below  Por  Printing   B4 arm  100     123    ee       trait direction   Paper   A4 71    82    100    116           B5 61  71  87    100                 Original    gt  A6 B7 A7 B8                      Paper output A3 200  za ESE  e    direction  Printing B4 173    200           Note  Paper   ad   138    163    200         e With the optional ADF unit you can print two dif  B5 122    141    173    200                       ferent originals side by side on a single sheet of  paper  2 in 1 printing   Set the two originals one                      above the other  Original  e To print two copies of the same original side by
181. l Release Dial               ceeeeeeeeeeee 228  ADF Original Release Lever                    005 23  228  ADF Semi Auto onni r aeiae 155  168  ADF Unit 2 200 002  en ection vA a eaa etek 23  AON  2522 ee ert te i a tee at ke  166  ACMin  SCLO N iaieineea i 27  Advanced Features                cccccceseeeeeeeeeseeteeeees 114  Auto 90  Rotation   00 2    eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169  Alito  Clear 2 2055  cece Mie eet ahead hen ds 170  Auto Document Feeder AF VI II 00 00 00    23  256  Auto Document Feeder DX 1                  ee 23  256  Auto Idling           eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 149  171  Auto Page Renewal                cccccceeeeee 150  171  Auto Power OF F            ccc cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneees 170  Auto Process Mode                ccccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeteees 168  Auto Sleep ee 170  Auto control Stacking Tray          c eeseeeeeee 39  40  A  t    Proce SS a a eee en 49  66  Auto Process Indicator                 ccccceeceeeteeeeteees 66  Auto Process Key         ccccceceesceeeeeeeesereeereeeeeeeneeaees 25  Auto process    OFF           cccccccccessececessseeeessees 51  57  Auto process    ON                cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 57  B   Base IP Address               c cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaes 169  Basic Screen              cccecceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeesenees 31  Beep Sound          cecccccecceeesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeaes 172  Binding margin sserssssrssriirardnainae 88  Book Shadow             
182. laten Cover Pad              ccccccccccccceceecesseeeeesseesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 217  Scanner Glass and White Sheet of ADF unit  Option    2 0 0 0       ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteees 218  Pressure  ROST is iscociodcetedictecesessdssutronwocdetscdedeaecets  sbuvevsedensateoteneacsusavecevstsdutuccesosessestaweweestes 219  TRE EXOT Of e penisi EPEAL EEE EIERE sia sbabsacdacedecstisniebteatesieatendeaagariiees 220  Troubleshooting 222  When a Message Displays ixconcict niu  Seti RA ee RRR 222  Error Message Layout           0   ccc cecceeeeeeeeeee eee eee e eee teas aeeeeeeeeeee steers teeeetee ete teeeea 222  Pop Up Message Layout              sennnesssersrerrrerrrerrsssnresnreerresrrterrterrstrrennnsnnnteraserrrerrretrrernnena 232  Consumable Information Screen 0    ccccccccccccccceeeceeeeceeeceeseeeseseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241  TOUDIS SING GUNG acer cece exsens eee eaae sence aden ceueuenebenrasdsecs E E a aa EEEa ET 244  Appendix 256  Optional ACCESSOLICS                    ssseeeeeeeeeeecceececeaeceeeeusssacsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeaaaaaasseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 256  Specifications  e ca eaty eet vas e a ae aah van E cad Aa a Re e E E caus anivansnteat teva cds gash gegua ea tent 5a 257    Welcome to the SE Series Model    Thank you for your purchase of this printing machine   This machine is a digital printer duplicator with the following functions     e This machine is equipped with an easy to use Touch Screen LCD display and features  
183. lder                            Note     e Dispose the depleted master core according to  the disposal rule of your local community   p 214    7 Install a new Master Roll            Do not remove  the tape             Remove the plastic shrink wrap from the new  Master Roll  and place in with the  i  mark to the  left     Replacing Consumables    Important      e Take care not to damage the  i  section when  removing the shrink wrap   If the  i  section is bent or the perforation cut   the master will become unusable       Do not remove the tape yet     Close the Master Roll Holder                    Remove the tape once the Master Roll Holder has  been closed     Insert the leading edge of the master  under the Master Guide Flap                       Insert the leading edge of the master into its  entrance under the Master Guide Flap and  advance it as far in as it will go        If the Master  is loose  turn the flange at the right towards the  rear and rewind           Replacing the Master Roll 205    Replacing Consumables    Tip    If You Cannot Insert the Master   Insert the leading edge of the Master using the fol    lowing steps    1  Raise the Master Guide Flap  Turn the dial on the edge of the Master Guide  Flap towards the rear and raise the Master  Guide Flap    2  Pull out the master to the line indicated by the  arrow    3  Lower the Master Guide Flap                    10 Return each part to its original posi   tion                                         Return
184. lowing appropriate environment conditions   Temperature range  15  C to 30  C  59  F to 86  F   Humidity range  40  to 70   noncondensing     Machine Handling       AWARNING   Do not place water containers or metallic objects on the machine  Fire or electric shock may occur if water or metal   lic objects fall into the machine     Do not use combustible spray and flammable solvent near the machine   If sprayed gas and flammable solvent contact electronic components inside the machine  fire or electric shock  might occur     Do not insert any metallic material or flammable substance into the machine through any opening  This can result  in fire or electric shock     Do not remove machine covers  Exposing internal parts may result in electric shock   Do not disassemble or rebuild the machine by yourself  This can result in fire or electric shock     If the machine emits excessive heat  smoke or foul odor  immediately turn off the POWER  unplug the power cord  and contact your dealer  or authorized service representative   Failure to do so can result in fire or electric shock     If something drops inside the machine  immediately turn off the POWER  unplug the power cord and contact your  dealer  or authorized service representative   Failure to do so can result in fire or electric shock     Never stick your hands or fingers in the openings of the machine during operation   Keep loose clothing or long hair away from moving parts to avoid becoming entangled   Do not place heavy o
185. lternatively  press the key or the    key to clear         Starting Up Network Card    Please Wait a Moment           Symptom   RISO Network Card is starting up      Action   Please wait a moment   Alternatively  print from the machine        Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear         238 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message       I  The Data Storage Area  has Become Full     Clear Old Storage Data     Symptom   Insufficient free space on the Document  Storage Card     Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear         For checking the storage memory         Action  Touch  St M  Check the stored data and delete oioi  olorags Memory  unnecessary jobs    The file size is too large  Symptom  Touch  Close      to store on USB Flash Drive  Change the USB Flash Drive  or delete some files   to make spaces    Insufficient free space on the USB Flash  Drive      Action   Check the USB Flash Drive data and  delete unnecessary jobs      Alternatively  press the key or the    key to clear      e For checking the USB Flash Drive  data        I  The Number of Storage  Data has Become Full     Clear Old Storage Data  in the Selected Folder     Symptom   The selected folder is full of data      Action    Check the contents of the folder and  delete unnecessary data   Alternatively  select another folder     Touch  USB Job List    Touch  Close     Alternatively  
186. lug the power cord or turn off the power during operation   e Be sure to open and close all machine covers gently     12 Safety Guide   Handling and Operation    Before Starting to Use    USB Flash Drive    Important     e Use a USB Flash Drive that is compatible with the Mass Storage Class  Depending on the types of USB Flash  Drive  the machine may not work properly    e When connecting or disconnecting the USB Flash Drive  follow the proper procedures     e We cannot guarantee data saved in the USB Flash Drive against loss caused by accidents or unforeseen events   We recommend that you use your computer to make back up copies of any important documents     Consumables          Important     For Ink and Master Roll  it is recommended to use the products specified by Riso    Genuine RISO Inks and Master Roll are engineered for maximum performance and maximum life    However  all supplies can and do deteriorate over time  We recommend that you use Ink and Master Roll as soon  as possible after purchase  and within 18 months from the date of manufacturing    You can find the date of manufacturing on the Ink Cartridge or the inside of Master Core    Store consumables such as Master Roll and Ink properly    Do not store the consumables in the following places         Locations that are subject to direct sunlight or bright locations that are close to windows   If there is no other choice  curtain the window          Locations that are subject to rapid changes in temperature     
187. ly  Silent                       c   ceceeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaneaseseeseess 98  Adjusting the Print Density  Print Density Adjustment                cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetttteeeeeees 99  Adjusting the Print Position  Print Position Adjustment                 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentttetnaeeees 100  Printing Proof Copies  Proof   seccainidiniwn nda dscicuilat it  ararGink anid 102  Prevent Paper Jams When Using Special Paper  D Feed Check                         eee 103  Extending the drying time  Interval                   cccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 104  Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types   Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl  0 0 0    cccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeess 105  Setting the Jump Wing Control  Jump Wing Control                 cccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeteees 106  Saving Settings and Renaming the Parameter Names in the Parameter List                   107  Retrieving Settings from the Parameter LiSt                cc ccccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeseenenaees 109  Making changes to Special Paper Ctrl Setting               cccceceeeeeeceeeteeeeneeeeeeseeneaeeeeeeseeneeeees 110  Clearing Special Paper Ctrl Settings               cccccccceeeeeceneeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeesseieaeeeeseeees 111  Adjusting the Auto control Stacking Tray   when using the optional Auto control Stacking Tray   Receive Tray                  ceeee 112  
188. master core  If you did so  set a new  master roll     p 204       The Master Disposal Box  cannot be removed     The    Protect    setting is ON     If the    Protect    setting is ON  the Master  Disposal Box cannot usually be removed    p 182       The Master Disposal Box lever is  locked     Slide the Master Disposal Box lever to the  right to unlock    If the Master Disposal Box is padlocked   contact the administrator to undo the  padlock    p 209       There is no image on copies     The original is placed face up     Check which side of the original was  placed on the Glass Platen or in the ADF  unit  See    Placing the original     p 41         The master is installed with the  incorrect side out     Reinstall the Master Roll with correctly   p 204          Some areas are missing in the  printed copy     The Glass Platen  and or the ADF  Scanner Glass  is not clean     Clean the Glass Platen  and or the ADF  Scanner Glass      p 216       A foreign object may exist on the  master     Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  check if any object exists on the master  If  a foreign object exists between the master  and the Print Drum  Cylinder   remove the  master  Then set the Print Drum  Cylinder   and perform the master making operation  again              The paper size placed on the Feed  Tray was not the same as the size  of the original at the time of the  master making process     The Feed Tray Paper Guides were  not fit to the width of paper at the    time of th
189. mselves     User identification access     during operations  The Recognition and Identification System can be  selected from either    PIN Code    or    USB Flash Drive    which is set by the administrator in advance        When Operating the Machine When Outputting the ID Print       User identification access is required                 PIN Code USB Flash Drive    o               High Full    User identification access is not required  Management             eS          User identification access is required    PIN Code USB Flash Drive          r CE       User identification access    Mid ID Print Only is not required                                                                                     Low Admin tab only User identification access is not required ID Print cannot be performed             User Management Options  To activate the User Management function  the administrator must set up User Management  The setting options of  User Management and details are explained below          Recognized by     7 p 117   Select the Recognition and Identification System   PIN Code  When user identification access is required  input the PIN Code   Set up to 8 digits for each user in    Create User      USB Flash Drive  When user identification access is required  connect the registered USB Flash Drive to the USB slot   Prepare the number of USB Flash Drives for the individual users and register them with the machine   OFF Delete  Delete the information registered in User Mana
190. n 46 g m   12 Ib bond   Extremely thick or heavy paper   Using the Paper Feed Tray  greater than 210 g m   110 Ib index   Wrinkled  curled  folded  or torn paper    Chemically treated or coated paper  such as thermal or carbon paper   Paper having a sticky section or holes  such as an envelope and label paper     SELF  TIND    Paper with a horizontal grain direction can cause problems with paper supply  Use paper with a vertical grain direc   tion    Images are not output onto the entire area of usable print paper  The maximum printing areas differ among models   p 19   When using poorly cut paper or coarse surfaced paper  drawing paper  etc    arrange the paper neatly before use   Depending on the type of paper used  paper dust may be generated when using the machine  Please clean and   ventilate the area adequately    Riso does not assure that paper outside the above specifications can pass through the machine and can be used for  printing     16 Paper Recommendations    Before Starting to Use    Tips for Better Paper Feeding       To prevent paper jams and misfeeds  follow the directions below     When using standard or light weight paper  set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to    NORMAL      lt  lt     Then open all four Paper Arrangers   p 35   p 36   When using thick paper  such as card stock   set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to    CARD    C      and open the two inner Paper Arrangers     p 35    p 36   When using slippery paper  set the Paper Feed
191. n the  Paper Feed Tray     Printing Paper       4  Set in the same orientation as shown in  step 1       Original orientation    L  ZR       Selecting Scanning Sides When Using the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Scanning Side  ADF  159    Advanced Features    Checking User Counters  ID Counter Report     Each user can output counter data  number of prints  etc   when checking usage status     Important    e    ID Counter Report    can be outputted only when the    User Management    function is set       Report Output  Counter data can be output by following methods      Print  Prints the counter data   E mail  E mail attached with the counter data is sent to the e mail addresses set as the destination   The mail settings must be set in advance  For details on mail settings  the RISO Network Card is required  For  details  see the    RISO Network Card User   s Guide      USB Flash Drive  Outputs the counter data to the USB Flash Drive   USB Flash Drive must be connected to the USB slot in advance     Note     e By using the    RISO Utility Software     RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER  included on the provided CD ROM  the  counter data output to the USB Flash Drive can be managed by a computer   For details  see the    RISO Utility Software User   s Guide        Setting the reminder date  For regular counting  a reminder date can be set   The following screen is displayed on the set date     Please inform this message  to your administrator   Due date for   ID counter report             Cl
192. n you     insert a hand inside the machine to remove  paper  be careful not to touch the paper  separation hook or master removal hook   This may cause injury        Master Removal Hook                            Separation Hook                   Paper did not eject correctly  1  Check for any jammed paper on the paper  exit area     2  Touch  OK      Note       e When using special paper  adjust the  Paper Arranger on the Receiving Tray  Paper Guides according to the paper  characteristics    p 34                When a Message Displays 231    Troubleshooting    Pop Up Message Layout       Pop Up Messages communicates various operational statuses   You can continue operation over some of them  but depending upon the context  others will require your action before  operations can be resumed         1  Error Number    A reference letter  E F  and an ID number     2  Pop Up Messages  Content of the message     Page Format is Larger  than Paper Size   I  Possible Ink Smudges  on Prints                Cancel Continue                         status of the machine     Error Number Error Types Description Referen  ce page  E00 000 Maintenance Call Pops up when battery replacement ora routine p 232  inspection by a service personnel is required   Pops up when printing job cannot proceed due to a  F00 000 Warning Messages conflict between a Control Panel setting andthe     p 233          E00 000 Maintenance Call  in alphabetical order           Contact your dealer  or authorized  servi
193. n you are currently on     Loop     The screen changes as shown below when the  key is pressed     e Normally     Master Making Basic Screen     lt    gt     Print  Basic Screen     e When the optional Document Storage Card is    installed     Scan Basic Screen     lt   gt     Master Making   Print Basic Screen                      166 Changing Default Settings  Admin      Advanced Features                                              Display Access Functions Description  Button   Start Up Screen Logo RISO  Logo SE  Character  Select an animation to display at Start up   Metric Inch Switch  for SE9480 only  Inch mm  Change the format for displaying measurements to  metric or inches  imperial    Display Adjustment Background Blue White  Change the background color  density and brightness   Display Density  of the Touch Screen   5   4      1  0   1     4   5  When    ECO mode    is set to    ON     the Backlight Backlight Lightness     Display  Lightness is locked at     2      2   1  0   1   2  Job list display From top  From bottom  Change the file name display of the stored data in  Storage Selection Screen  Job List Screen and USB  Job List Screen   Displayed Language  01   02   03      Select the language displayed on the screen   Important    e Contact your dealer  or authorized service   representative  to change the settings   Image Processing Line Photo Duo  Text and  Change the default setting for the    image processing   Photo  Pencil  mode      Scanning Contrast e 
194. nagement   The User Management function has 3 Management Levels  The following features are available according to the    level        Feature    Management Level                          Admin   settings    p 166                High Full Mid ID Print Only Low Admin tab   Management Only   ID Cou nter Report  for managing the number Available Available Not Available  of prints masters    p 160 For ID print only   Limit  for setting the upper limit of the number Available Available Not Available  of copies masters per user set  p 123    ee aa a Available Available Not Available   My Direct Access  for registering the  frequently accessed functions displayed in the Available Not Available Not Available  Direct Access Area  p 164  Saving scanned originals for  ID Print   p 52 Available Not Available Not Available  Allowing only the administrator to change the Available Available Available       All users must be registered to manage the machine at the High Full Management level   Also  users must input a PIN Code  or connect a registered USB Flash Drive  to use the machine     This section explains settings for using the User Management function and how to make those settings set by the    Administrator     114 Setting Up User Management  User Management        Advanced Features    Management Level and Access Timing of User Identification Access   When    Management Level    is set to    High Full Management    or    Mid ID Print Only     the users will be asked to identify  the
195. ncel_J __OK__      Program A  Total 1280    G Cps  Sets   G  Cps  Sets Entry Call        wr  CICILY     CI                                                                      Note   e Press the Cy  key and skip to step 3 of the SS         Single Page Mode     Press the G   key and oo  C        skip to step 3 of the    Multi Page Mode           2 Touch  Single  or  Multiple    1  Enter the number of copies using the Print  Quantity Keys                       ORT UNM OM ELCM ERICH 2  Press the  x  key or the key     Program Type 3  Enter the number of sets  in the group   j 01G using the Print Quantity Keys   Be 4  Press the     key or the key   026  Eee T th tst  CJ Ce     ume   rae more than one group  repeat steps  Note     To cancel or change a number  press the  key and enter again        To clear all  number of copies and number of  sets   touch  Clear All     e The total number of all copies to be printed is  shown on the top of the screen        132 Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program     Important      To save the current Programed Printing set   tings  touch  Entry Call     Once  OK  is touched  the setting cannot be  saved  See    Saving Programs      p 134  for  further information       For Multi Page Mode       Multi Page Mode        Program B  Total 21       Cps  Cps  Entry Call              Page01 Page04   Page02 Page05   Page03 Page06  3   Clear All                                                 1     2   3     Enter the number of copies using the Print  Q
196. nd lower the Paper  be closed  not been widen up to the limit  Feed Tray to the bottom  Set the Feed  Tray Paper Guide Lock Lever to  lt p A  The power was turned off before the   widen the Feed Tray Paper Guides up to  Paper Feed Tray was lowered to the   the limit  and close the Paper Feed Tray           bottom   The Print Drum  Cylinder  The Print Drum  Cylinder  was After manually rotating the Print Drum  cannot be placed into position    stopped at an inappropriate position    Cylinder   make sure that the     mark  after rotation  and the  lt  mark meet as shown                       The Print Drum  Cylinder  has not Set the Print Drum  Cylinder  to the guide  been correctly set to the guide  correctly   p 213                   244 Troubleshooting    Troubleshooting       Problem    Possible Cause    Action       An error indication does not  disappear even though  consumables  Ink  master roll   are set     The consumables  Ink  master roll   have not been correctly set     After inserting the Ink Cartridge  turn it  clockwise      to lock  Or set the Ink  Cartridge again       p 207       Set a master roll so that the G  mark  comes to the left  and set the Master  Making Unit     p 204       The Ink Cartridge does not contain  Ink information     Do not remove the label attached on the  Ink Cartridge outlet section  If you did so   set a new Ink Cartridge     p 207       The master roll does not contain  master information     Do not remove the  i  section from the  
197. nding on the  type of paper you use  In this case  print at the normal  speed    If the conditions to print at a speed of 185 sheets   minute are met  the following icon is displayed during     High Speed    printing     0 0 mm       0 0 mm                   Printing           Job Ends in 1 min           Printing at High Speed  High Speed  97    Functions for Printing    Printing More Quietly  Silent     In    Silent    mode  print speed is automatically adjusted to reduce noise levels     Touch  Silent  on the Print Basic Screen     Select Print Quantity    Print Position Paper      a    High Speed    D Feed  Check   6  Black E Idle J B info J       Silent    mode is set   Selecting    Silent    mode reduces the print speed   Print  Speed 1      Note    e To cancel    Silent    mode during printing  touch   Silent  to return to the previous speed    e The Print Speed Adjustment Keys on the Control  Panel can also be used to change print speed           z                98 Printing More Quietly  Silent     Functions for Printing    Adjusting the Print Density     Print Density Adjustment     You can select the print density from five levels     You can adjust the print density while printing is in progress     Important      e    Print Density    is not available when    Ink Saving    is selected     p 70  Note     The factory default is set at level 3  Standard    p 167    p 167  Print Speed   p 167  Print Density     Press the or    gt   key to adjust the  print density    
198. needed for print operations   Touch the buttons on the screen to execute various print  operations     11    12    13       16 17 18 19  11  Ink Cartridge Cap Holder   p 207   Secure the Ink Cartridge cap   12  Front Cover  13  Print Drum  Cylinder    p 211   14  Ink Cartridge   p 207   15  Print Drum  Cylinder  Handle   p 211        16  Print Drum  Cylinder  Release Button   p 211     Unlocks the Print Drum  Cylinder  for removal   17  Counter    Counts the number of rotations of the Print Drum  Cylin     der   total Drum  Cylinder  rotation counter  and the    number of masters made  master counter    18  Master Making Unit Handle   p 204     19  Master Making Unit Release Button    p 204     Unlocks the Master Making Unit for removal     20  Master Making Unit   p 204   21  USB Slot   p 46   Connect the USB Flash Drive     22  Paper Jumping Wing   p 106     Automatically adjusts to keep the printed paper neatly    stacked   23  Paper Arranger     p 37   Press to open for aligning the printed paper   24  Receiving Tray Paper Guides   p 37   Aligns the printed paper neatly     Slide according to the width of paper to be printed     Getting Acquainted    Auto Control Stacking Tray   Option              25  Paper Stopper   p 37   Slide to adjust to the length of print paper size   26  Paper Receiving Tray   p 37   Printed copies are output to this tray   27  Power Switch  p 34   28  Master Making Unit Cover     p 204   Open and close to install the Master Roll   29  Master Gui
199. nes 193  Changing the Data Order              ccccccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeecneeeseseseceaeeeeeeseeenieeeeeessees 195  Using the Storage Retrieve USB Job List Screen       ccccccccceeeeeeeessssesseneeseseeseeeaes 196  Overlaying Storage Data onto a Print Job  Overlay                ccccceccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 197    Copying Moving Stored Data               ccccccceececcccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaaaeaeasseeeeeeeeeeeeenes 199    Contents                Replacing Consumables 202  Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables                  cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 202  Replacing the Master Roller pienenee toetre aces seeeeuncs Ceneed nececest senedeeze daesdsestcent ona ee 204  Replacing the  Ink Cartridge  sssini ee woah eneseediin  207  Emptying the Master Disposal BOX i22 4cte dette Gk ool sd ela At ee te leet 209  Replacing the Print Drum  Cylinder           2       c c 2sececceccnececececeeeeseeeeeeseensessseesteedesescccnenees 211  Removing the Print Drum  Cylinder                 ccccceceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseenenaees 211  Installing the Print Drum  Cylinder                ccccceceeceeeeneeceeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesesenueeeeeeseeesnnees 213  Disposal of Depleted Consumables                  cccccccecccceceneeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaesneeseeeseees 214  Maintenance 216  eere nlo a eee EA A ee eee 216  Thermal  Print Heads atctisncsccecntnensi A AL E AE iene 217  Glass Platen and P
200. normal printing  AGG e R    Flow of original    gt  a        In output reversal    SERNA               Important    To use this function  the optional Document Storage Card is required     While scanning the original  if there is no free memory space  the scanning stops to display a message  After can   celing original scanning or arranging  clearing  the storage data  scan the original once again    You cannot use    Output Reversal    unless you set    Cl Select    to    Internal Cl    on the Admin  Screen  See    Changing  Default Settings Cl Select      p 168      Note      Output reversal    is not available in combination with the following functions   e Program   Multiple      e Preview  e Overlay  e Storage Memory    Set the original and print paper  3 Configure print functions   Place the original on the Glass Platen or in the Set various functions as needed   optional ADF unit   To place the original  see    p 41  4 Press the key  T h  Output   th Scan the 1st original   ouc    Output reversal  on the When the optional ADF unit is used  proceed to  Functions Screen  step 6 after all the originals are scanned automat   ically     OReady to scan data  lt Reverse gt  5 When the original has several pages     Select ions Funct ions replace the originals and repeat  steps 3 and 4   Output reversal       Scanning Side  ADF   High Speed               The button is inverted  and    Output Reversal    is  set to    ON           Print the original from the last page  Output r
201. ns   Set various functions as needed     9 Press the key     Scanning of 1st page of the original starts     10 Scan all originals and make a mas   ter     When you set the original on the Glass Platen   replace the original and repeat steps 8 and 9   Repeat scanning until the set number of images  have been scanned    If the original has less pages than the set number  of pages  touch  H  gt   Yes  after all of the original  has been uch D The unscanned part becomes  blank     OReady to scan data  lt Layout gt     Page No 4    Page  A4  Contrast           ee D Feed  Print Ra   G3  Black m Hide    mno     When original scanning is complete  a master is  made and the Printing Basic Screen is displayed     Note     e The original is laid out in the scanned order     e If you want to cancel the layout setting after set   ting the number of images  perform step 2 to  display the Layout Screen  Touch  OFF  and  then  OK                        aP IP    Set the Ist original  in direction shown  in the right figure          Laying out continuous originals on one sheet of paper  Layout  83    Functions for Master Making    Printing from Bound Documents   Book Shadow     You can erase the binding    spine    shadow in the center when printing from such bound originals with facing as mag   azines and books    You can select the area to be erased  erasure width     Moreover  magazines or books can be spread open on the Glass Platen and their pages printed onto separate sheets     Importa
202. nstalled  the Warning Message will clear           When a Message Displays 239    Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message          Unmatched Paper Size     Interposal Paper is Smaller  than Printing Paper   Check Interposal Paper Size     Symptom   Interposal Papers are smaller than  paper size      Action   Load Interposal Papers of appropriate  size in the tray     Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear            Unmatched Size    Current Page and  Printing Paper     Check Paper Size           Symptom   The original data sent from the computer  does not match the print paper size      Action   Check the print paper size and change  paper or size as needed          When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue     Alternatively  press the key to  print        When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or  the key to clear         240 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting    Consumable Information Screen       In order to assure optimum printing  the machine acquires information from the consumables   If acquired matching information is not proper  the Consumable Information Screen is shown   Enter appropriate values   The    icon on the Info Button will be grayed out when this occurs    p 203  Note   e Entering an inappropriate value does not affect usual operations but may result in bad print quality   e When you perform the following operations  the values set on
203. nt    e The original must be placed aligning center on the Glass Platen as shown below        e If the erasure width is set to    Auto     the following image areas are also erased  or half toned        Acontinuous black image area  non white  from the edge of the original        Acontinuous black image area from the center of the original    Note   e Book Shadow function cannot be used with the following functions       Top Margin  when  Page split  is selected   Binding margin      Ink Saving  Scanning Contrast   Auto    Multi Up Print      Scanning Side  ADF      Layout    If you use the    Book Shadow    with the Gauge Cover installed  the surrounding image gets black on the master   If a Gauge Cover is installed  remove the Gauge Cover and then use the    Book Shadow        If you are scanning a thick book such as an encyclopedia  raise the hinge of the glass platen cover and press  down for best results     el    84 Printing from Bound Documents  Book Shadow                                   Functions for Master Making    Erasing Shadows when Printing       If you specify the erasure width  original detec   tion is not performed automatically  Touch  Era   sure Width   and then touch the  Page Size  for  the magazine or book you have placed     OLETTAEN ELCA VER G Note   Selections W Functions e If you also select    Page split     you can print the    left and right pages of a bound original sepa   Program J Tone Curve J rately  See    Splitting Facing Pages of a Bound
204. nt buttons     ORCE CRV ETCIIEN GI  Tone Curve    Gradation Image          G Lights E  Shadows    EE  ES                  e Lights  Adjusts the portion of the picture most  exposed to light       Shadows  Adjusts the portion of the picture  least exposed to light     Use   1  or   1  to strengthen or weaken each  respectively     3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen     Tone Curve     setting is updated        Adjusting Photo Gradation  Tone Curve  69    Functions for Master Making    Saving Ink  Ink Saving     Selecting    Ink Saving    makes a master that requires less Ink when printing     Important        The Ink consumption saving process may result in lighter prints than usual    This function is not available at the time of printing  It must be selected before the master making process is  started       Contrast    and    Print Density Adjustment    functions are not available when    Ink Saving    is selected    p 60   p 99    Touch  Ink Saving  on the Functions  Screen     O Ready to Make Master    10 Ink saving    Functions       __D Feed Check _  Feed Check  Idling Action i  Paper Interposal    Confidential         Ink Saving    is set        i  i Ink Saving    will appear in the message area     Note     e    Ink Saving    is a useful function for master making   Even if this function is set or canceled during printing   it doesn t reflect on the master that is currently rolled  around the Print Drum  Cylinder     The setting will be reflected on the n
205. ntity will restore the number originally entered     e On the Admin  Screen  you can make such a setting that    Auto Process       is always set to ON when you reset or  start the machine    p 168    AUTO PROCESS    Press the key            AUTO PROCESS          M    Z                The Auto Process indicator turns on     Note     The indicator turns off     e With factory default settings  if multiple originals are  placed in the optional ADF unit and    Auto Process       is  set to ON  all originals will be printed automatically        66 Automatic Printing  Auto Process     Functions for Master Making    Processing Photos with Dot Screen     Dot Process        Dot Process    function processes photo originals with dot screening in order to print more clearly     Select from four types of dot patterns     Important      e If an  Image  is set to  Line  or  Pencil    Dot Process  cannot be used     Touch  Dot Process  on the Func   tions Screen     ORNETA ORE CGV ERGI       Selections Functions    Program J Tone Curve J  Job Memory J Multi Up Print J    lt  om                      2 Select a dot pattern     O Readv to Make Master                                           Number 1 2 3 4  Equivalent Lpi 212 106 71 53  Note     e Touch  OFF  to cancel the    Dot Process           3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen     Dot Process     setting is updated     Processing Photos with Dot Screen  Dot Process  67    Functions for Master Making    Adjusting Photo Contr
206. ntly wipe the Thermal Print Head in the back of the unit several times with  a soft cloth or tissue        Important    e Since the Thermal Print Head is very delicate  avoid shocks or scratches with a hard object     e Since Thermal Print Head is susceptible to  damage by  static electricity  please be sure to remove the static elec   tricity charged in the body before cleaning     Glass Platen and Platen Cover Pad       If the Glass Platen and or Platen Cover Pad is stained  gently wipe them with a soft cloth or tissue           Glass Platen                      Important    e Since the Glass Platen is very delicate  avoid shocks or scratches with a hard object     Cleaning 217    Maintenance    Scanner Glass and White Sheet of ADF unit  Option        Gently wipe the Scanner Glass  and the White Sheet several times with a soft cloth or tissue     Important    e Since the Glass Platen is very delicate  avoid shocks or scratches with a hard object                      For the Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  Clean while rotating the White Roller                         For the Auto Document Feeder DX 1  The white Sheet does not rotate                    218 Cleaning    Maintenance    Pressure Roller       If the Pressure Roller  which presses print paper against the Print Drum  Cylinder   is stained  smudged strips may  appear on the back of copies    If this happens  gently wipe the Pressure Roller with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol    To remove the Print Drum  Cylinder  
207. o Make Master  lt Ext Paper gt     or     Ready to Print  lt Ext Paper gt           On    Extended Paper    mode  the machine can  print papers measuring 436 mm 555 mm   175 32  2127 30   lengthwise from top to bottom  facing the paper feed direction  However  max   imum printing area and top bottom Print Posi   tioning range remains as usual      p 19    p 100   Print timing and speed is different on    Extended  Paper    mode in comparison to normal printing   This is to be expected  so do not be alarmed     e Contact your dealer  or authorized service rep   resentative  for suggestions about placing  paper on the Paper Receiving Trays when on     Extended Paper    mode        180 Registering a Custom Paper Size  Custom Paper Entry     Deleting a Custom Paper Size    Advanced Features       1 Touch  Admin   on the Basic Screen  for each mode     OLEO AORVELCRVER GI    Page  A4  Contrast Size          y Black Wide      2 Touch  OK      OREA ORV ELCA ERG    Resets current settings  once opened    C    0       3 Touch  Custom Paper Entry  on the  Admin  Screen     All Custom Paper Entry J           S  Display rea i    OFF  Default Folder Renaming J  System Cl Select J   Internal CI  Editor Base IP Address J                         4 Touch  Clear      Custom Paper Entry    Select a Button to be Cleared                   Register CardA W 200 XH 300 mm  No Entry  No Entry  Clear  pe No Entry    Jen CD          5 Select the paper size to delete     Custom Paper Entry    Select a B
208. oaded in the  Paper Feed Tray  on the Glass Platen or the optional  ADF unit  the 90 degree rotation setting can be used to  align original and output documents     ON  OFF       Clock Calendar   Set the internal clock of the machine    The time date displays on the   Info Screen     p 203    Year Month Day Hour Minute       Multi Up Interval  Select the interval time  seconds  between first and  second scans when using Multi Up Printing     15s  30s       Reserve Period   Selects a duration of time  seconds  for an inactive  machine to receive data from a computer  but restricts  processing any output command     OFF 15s 30s 60s          Ex  Reserve Period  When    Reserve Period    is set  extends the Reserve  Period  minutes  to prevent data interruption        5mn 10mn 30mn       Changing Default Settings  Admin   169       Advanced Features                   Power OFF Schedule    Display Access Functions Description  Button  Auto Clear e Auto Clear  Select whether to reset all settings to default OFF ON  automatically when the machine is inactive for a set   Waiting Time  period  minutes   1 60 mn  factory default is 5  The    Renew Page    function cannot be used after mn   executing    Auto Clear     If you use    Renew Page     frequently  we recommend setting this to    OFF      Energy Saving Mode e Energy Saving Mode  Select to activate Sleep Mode or Shutdown Power OFF Auto Sleep Auto Power   when the machine is inactive for a set period of time  OFF    OFF e Waitin
209. off at a specified time                 mm 64     Numeric keypad is available for input        Touch  ON  to display more options on the right       Additional Setup Screen Available    Text Input Type   Input the name after touching the button whose  name to be changed    Touch the button and the Rename Screen  appears        Cancel   OK      Folder Renaming       older       older          _folder          _folder          older                   _folder          Cancel    Rename    rr        CILL LLL  LL ILL LL LLL                         Touch the character buttons to enter text   Change capitalization by selecting  Small  or   Capital  button    p 136       Advanced Features      Additional Setup Screen Available    Data Specification Type   A screen to specify the stored data is dis   played    See  p 193 for details on specifying the data                                                                 Storage Selection  1  a2  as   e fos 6    1_folder Free Area  98MB 90   P 1 1    NewsLetter doc Admn Nov25 XX    Fax cover doc RISO Nov25 XX  Nov25 XX  Nov25 XX    Newsletter doc RISO    Images doc RISO       ID Print Job      USB Job List         5 Touch  OK         Base IP Address    E a                             sooo      Numeric keypad is available for input        Skip to step 6 if there is no additional Setup  Screen   Note     e Touch  Cancel  to cancel the changes and  return to the Admin  Screen        The selected value is displayed to the right side  of the b
210. ol  Top Margin  Paper Size  detection  Renew Page  Dot Process  4 types   Preview  Rotate  Scanning Side   with optional ADF DX 1   Admin  Mode  Interval Printing  Max  Scan  Special  Paper Control  Auto 90   Rotation  Protect  Paper Size Selection  Overlay  with  optional memory card or USB Flash Drive   Direct Print  Storage memory  with  optional memory card   Scan Mode  with optional memory card or USB Flash  Drive   My Direct Access  ID Counter Report  USB Job List  with USB Flash  Drive   Custom Paper Entry  Programmed Printing  2 types   Direct Access  Entry  Selections Entry  Book Shadow  RISO i Quality System  Scanning  Contrast  Manual Auto   Multi Up Print  2 up Single Original Multiple Original   Multi Up Tickets   ADF Semi Auto  with optional ADF unit installed   Energy  Saving Mode  Auto Sleep  Auto Power OFF   ECO Mode    When in use    1415 mm W  x 705 mm D  x 665 mm H   5523 32  W  x 273 4  D  x 263 46   H    When in storage    780 mm W  x 705 mm D  x 665 mm H   3023 32  W  x 273 4  D  x 263 16   H    1655 mm  W  x 1310 mm  D  x 1505 mm  H     65 5 32   W  x 51 9 46   D  x 59 1 4   H      Approx  115 kg  254 Ib     IEC 60950 1 compliant  Indoor  pollution degree 23  At altitudes of 2000 m or  lower    e Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine  some images and explanations in this manual  may not correspond to your machine     e The specifications are subject to change without prior notice    1 The height includes the height of the dedi
211. on of the Storage Retrieve USB Job List Screen is shown below   An example of the Storage Retrieve Screen is explained here        Storage Retrieve      document 1 doc  Format  A4                                                                               Cancel Retrieve    Owner  Admn  Date amp Time  Nov22 XX_ 10 58                                    f  Newsletter w      _Rotate_  Copy Move   g utput    Al   Pages  EN 3  Ascend Ascend   4  te Clear a 6  eg    L Color Black  2     p14 L e   Preview       7  i      umbnail is displayed for each page  o ove  1  A thumbnail is displayed f h pag 5  Copy M  2  If the data contains multiple pages  touch to Copy Move the stored data between the Storage Mem   change page ory and USB Flash Drive  From the Storage Retrieve  i Screen  copy move data to the USB Flash Drive  From  3  Touch to rotate the storage data USB Flash the USB Job List Retrieve Screen  copy move data to the  Drive data 180 degrees and output  Storage Memory   4  Output Range For details  see   p 199     If the storage data consists of multiple pages  you can  specify which pages to print  Touch  Output  to display  the Output Screen        Storage Retrieve                    Numeric keypad is available for input           Touch the corresponding buttons to print all pages  only  odd pages  or only even pages You can also specify  whether to print the selected pages in  Ascend  or   Descend  order    To specify a page range  touch the page input box and  touch eit
212. ons    Counter Display    Scanning Side  ADF      Job Separation  Special Paper Ctrl    C4   P  4 4          2 Touch  Receive Tray      Special Paper Ctrl       Entry Call d  Paper Feed adj       TaY Upper Limit  3 Paper Feed Amount  Paper Eject Adj _  Ar Blow  4 Separation Fan    Pre suction Fan  Suction Fan             3 Touch the relevant adjustment but   tons        Receive Tray                 e  D  Eng  0mm    Omm    i     Wider    Narrower     Narrower                       Automatic adjustment of the  Receiving Tray Paper Guides   Stopper  Touch  Auto  to adjust the position of the  Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper auto   matically to the standard positions for the  paper size      Detailed adjustments of the  Receiving Tray Paper Guides   Stopper  Touch either one of the four    Narrower    or     Wider    buttons to move the Receiving Tray  Paper Guides Stopper in approximately  0 5 mm  1 g4   increments     The adjustment value for the Receiving Tray  Paper Guides is displayed under    Side      while the Stopper adjustment is displayed  under    Eng       Detailed adjustments will be effective after  paper size is set    Touch  Auto  to reset both    Side    and    End     to the default value of 0 mm  0   and reacti   vate automatic adjustment     Note     e The Receiving Tray Paper Guides  side  can be  widened by pressing the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides    Opening Button during printing   p 22    Buttons  components activated and  direction of movement     
213. or stopping printing can also be changed from the display of the machine   p 57    Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List  49    Basic Operations    Printing Computer Data  Direct Print        The computer and printer must be connected by a cable     Note   e When    User Management    is set by the administrator  the users will be asked to identify themselves during oper     ations   p 46    1 Make sure the machine is ON   Check the Control Panel     Note      When the power is OFF  both the Display and  the key are off  Turn the power ON   p 34   e The machine automatically wakes up from  Energy Saving mode when data is sent from a  computer  and it starts processing the data     2 Check for printing paper     Make sure the paper is loaded     To load or to change the paper  see the following page   p 37   After replacing with paper of a different size   adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper  Guides and Paper Stopper    p 36    3 Set printing options from your com   puter screen     Use the printer driver     Important         Make sure to remove the checkmark from the     Collate    option in the Print dialog box     Note    e If you are using RISO Network Card  you can  check the machine status  power ON OFF   paper settings  etc   remotely from your compu   ter monitor     4 Click  OK  on the print dialog box     Data is sent from the computer    When the machine receives data  a print job auto   matically starts in accordance with the print
214. ored Data and Printing  Storage Memory  USB Job List  193    Storing Original Data and Use Method                3 Touch the stored data to print  5 Touch  Retrieve    The data is retrieved and Storage Mode Basic  Storage Selection Screen appears   1  e   n   e4 es  oe                   1_folder P1 O Ready to Make Master    document 1 doc  FAX cover doc i  Newsletter_P2     document_1 doc   P 1 4 Feed Tray  Owner  Admn i  Preview  Date amp Time  Nov22 XX 10 58  Format  A4 Skip Page       Images    ID Print Job    USB Job List    Process  Auto Process    OFF      Re oitiah  If you are selecting data stored in a different    folder  touch that folder s tab      Black                            Note      If the stored data is not shown on the screen   touch fa  or      to display  6 Press the key     Touching  USB Job List  or  Storage Mem  A master is made from the data   ory  displayed in the bottom right corner of the  screen switches to the Storage Selection After this  please follow the same operations for  Screen or USB Job List Screen  normally making a master printing     4 Confirm the retrieved data     Use the thumbnail to determine whether the  retrieved data is the data desired     Storage Retrieve      document 1 doc   Owner  Admn  Format  A4 Date amp Time  Nov22 XX 10 58    Rotate    Output    Al   Pages  2 SyAscend    Color Black                         Preview  A       From the Storage  USB Job List  Retrieve Screen   you can confirm retrieved data and specify ou
215. ort Output          Monthly Reminder       3 Touch  4  or U to set the reminder  date     Reminder will be displayed on the date below        Numeric keypad is available for input        If the  Date  button is grayed out  touch  OFF  and  input the date        Checking User Counters  ID Counter Report     Note    e Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter  numbers       The set date can be selected between 1 and 31       When setting the reminder date between the  29th   31st  and if the number of days in the  month is less than this range such as in Febru   ary  the Reminder Screen is displayed on the  last day of the month     e If you are not setting the reminder date  touch   OFF      Touch  OK      Set Date    Ce          Reminder will be displayed on the date belo    J    OFF     Numeric keypad is available for input     Returns to the ID Counter Report Screen   The reminder date is updated     Touch  Close      Returns to the Functions Screen     Note     e Once the reminder date is set  a    Reminder  Screen    is displayed on each reminder date  In  fact  this message is displayed each time the  machine is turned ON until the counter report is  output  If you do not want to output the counter  data on the set date of this month  touch  Stop  Reminder   The Reminder Screen is not dis   played until the reminder date of the next  month     Advanced Features    Showing Usage Status   Meter Display     The machine can record and display the following information   
216. ose    Important      e To manage usage status correctly  the following setting is required  If you do not make the following setting  you  cannot count the number of prints masters correctly         Set  Management Level  to  High Full Management  in User Management   p 114      If you print from the computer  be sure to use    ID Print     See the    RISO Printer Driver User   s Guide    for details     160 Checking User Counters  ID Counter Report     Outputting the Counter Report    Advanced Features       1 Touch  ID Counter Report  on the  Functions Screen     OCU VEC ELCEIENCH  Select ions    Funct ions    Jump Wing Control   My Dir  ccess J             2 Touch the button of the desired out   put method     ID Counter Report    Report Output          USB Flash Drive       Returns to the Basic Screen after output    If the mail setting is not set   E mail  is not avail   able    Consult your dealer  or authorized service repre   sentative  about mail settings    If the USB Flash Drive is not connected   USB  Flash Drive  is grayed out and not available        Checking User Counters  ID Counter Report  161    162    Advanced Features    Setting Up the Monthly Reminder       1 Touch  ID Counter Report  on the  Functions Screen     OCU VEC ELCEIENCH  ID Counter Report      Basic Select ions    Funct ions       Jump Wing Control   My Dir  ccess J  Ca   Pss          2 Touch  Set Date      E mail    USB Flash Drive      Set Date J  Stop i ader      ID Counter Report       Rep
217. ot available for selection    Some functions display only when optional  devices are installed     5 Touch  OK      Returns to DirectAccess Entry Screen or Selec   tions Entry Screen  The selected functions are  added    To add more functions  or to replace a button with  another function  repeat steps 2 5     6 Touch  OK      Returns to the Admin  Screen     Direct Access     area or    Selections    Screen is updated     7 Touch D     Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen or  Print Basic Screen     Setting Up Direct Access Area and Selections Tab  DirectAccess Entry   Selections Entry  177    Advanced Features    Registering a Custom Paper Size   Custom Paper Entry     Non standard paper sizes must be pre entered into memory  Once a paper size is stored into memory  it can be  retrieved with the  Paper  button from the Master Making Basic Screen    Up to 30 different sizes may be entered  Previously stored sizes can be modified or deleted    You can register paper sizes between 100 mm x 148 mm  315 4    x 513 46   to 340 mm x 555 mm  1319 39  x 2127 30     However  any paper longer than 436 mm  175 32   prints in extended paper mode     p 180    Important    e Custom paper sizes must be entered  Failure to do so may result in incorrect scanning     Entering sizes and changing names       Touch  Admin   on the Basic Screen 3 Touch  System  or    gt   to display  for each mode   Custom Paper Entry  on the screen     OREA ORV ELCA VERGI Admin     Page  A4  Contrast Size Di
218. ote   e For details of changes  see  p 105        110 Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl     Functions for Printing    Clearing Special Paper Ctrl Settings       1 Display the Parameter List Screen  4 Touch  OK    Follow steps 1 to 2   p 109      Important   Special Paper Ctrl  Amere    e First  check whether the setting can be cleared    Retrieve the appropriate setting and follow the    S  steps beginning with step 2   E UJ Te peta Hebe  e Cleared settings cannot be recovered  Cleared  aU ox   2  Touch  Clear   U       Cancel   Cox                    Special Paper Ctrl  Parameter List    Select a Button to be Cleared                   Returns to the Parameter List Screen  The  selected setting is cleared        Register  A    Retrieve    Poster    5 Touch  Close      Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl Screen     Rename           lt              3 Touch the button to clear        Special Paper Ctrl  Parameter List    Select a Button to be Cleared    Ca   A 1                                     Unregistered buttons are grayed out and are not  available        Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl  111    Functions for Printing    Adjusting the Auto control Stacking Tray     when using the optional Auto control Stacking Tray   Receive Tray        1 Touch  Special Paper Ctrl  on the  Functions Screen     Select Print Quantity    Selections Functi
219. oubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message          No Auto Reproduction  Size Selection with This  Combination of Original  and Printing Paper     Select Size Manually     Symptom    With the size of set original and printing  paper  auto reproduction cannot be  performed      Action   Modify the reproduction size     e When changing the    Size    setting   Touch  Size Setting        When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     Alternatively  press the key or  the GZ  key to clear            No Auto Reproduction  Size Selection with This  Combination of Original  and Printing Paper     Select Size Manually     Symptom   Auto Reproduction Size is less than  50  or more than 200       Action   Modify the reproduction size     When changing the    Size    setting   Touch  Size Setting     When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key or  the E key to clear         I  No Auto Reproduction  with This Original   and Printing Paper     Select Size Manually     Symptom    Auto reproduction is not available  because the size of the original could  not be detected      Action   Set the reproduction size manually     When changing the    Size    setting   Touch  Size Setting       When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key or  the  9  key to clear         No Master on Print Drum  Make a New Master     Symptom   You are attempting to print  but there is  no master on the Print Drum
220. ow many sets are to be cre   ated for each group        20 sheets 20 sheets    2 sets    1 set    1st group       x    30 sheets         7    40 sheets 40 sheets       S    Original          2 sets       7    50 sheets       A maximum of  ieee aes 99 sets       3       A maximum of  9999 sheets    A maximum of  150 groups    Note     e Ifyou are printing multiple originals with    Single Page    program  place multiple originals  up to 50  in the optional  ADF unit  and as long as    Auto Process    is    ON     the set program can be repeated and all originals are divided  into groups to print the number of copies specified     Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program  129    Advanced Features      Multi Page Mode    For multiple originals  different number of copies are printed for each original   Up to 9999 copies can be made from a single original   Each original can reproduce a pre assigned number of sheets  up to 20 originals      10 sheets    A 1st original    20 sheets  Al 2nd original pp    L 1 A maximum of  30 sheets 9999 sheets    A  3rd original                A maximum of  20 originals  Note     e This function cannot be used for printing from computer data  direct print    p 48    130 Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program     Advanced Features    How to Program Print       There are two ways to print in sets using    Program    printing feature   e Program  then print  without saving the settings  p 132  e Retrieve a saved program  then print  when program is reg
221. p on the  upper left of the Print Drum  Cylinder      6 Close the Front Cover     Ink Cartridge Cap Holder    JG                                                                                       4 Insert the new Ink Cartridge                       Align the arrow on the Ink Cartridge to the W  mark on the print drum  cylinder  unit  and insert  until it stops     5 Lock the Ink Cartridge                       Turn the Ink Cartridge clockwise   8  and lock in  position        208 Replacing the Ink Cartridge    Replacing Consumables    Emptying the Master Disposal Box    Used masters are held in the Master Disposal Box  When the Master Disposal Box becomes full  a message displays  and the machine stops  Discard the used masters       Caution    e Wash immediately with soap if you should get Ink on your hands  etc     Important      e The Master Disposal Box can be padlocked to prevent the information contained in the discarded master being  leaked  If the Master Disposal Box is safely protected by the padlock  be sure to contact the administrator before  discarding the master     e When    Protect    is ON  you can remove the Master Disposal Box only when the messages such as    Master Dis   posal Box is Full    or    Master Jammed in Disposal Unit    are displayed   p 182    Remove the Master Disposal Box  2 Discard the ejected masters     If the Master Disposal Box lever is locked  slide  the lever to the right to unlock                          Push Out Lever           
222. ple colors   Case included       Auto control Stacking Tray Il    The Receiving Tray Paper Guides Stopper are automatically adjusted according to the paper and reproduction  size       Wide Stacking Tray    This unit can take paper up to 340 mm x 555 mm  133 8  x 2127 32   in size       Key Card Counter    With a single button press  shows the numbers of printed copies and consumed masters within a given period of  time  This can help you manage costs       Job Separator    With the Programed Printing function  allows the machine to print and sort into groups separated by tape       Document Storage Card DM 128CF DM 512CF    A Storage Card for using the Storage Memory function       RISO Controller 1S300    A custom controller enabling the machine to be used as a network connected PostScript 3 printer       Stand D type     Stand N type     Card Feed Kit     Envelope Feed Kit     RISO Printer Driver for Macintosh    256 Optional Accessories    Appendix    Specifications    RISO SE9480    Master making printing methods  Original Type    Original Size  min  max      Original Paper Weight    Printing Paper Size  min  max      Paper Supply Capacity  Paper Receiving Capacity    Printing Paper Weight    Image Processing mode  Master making Time    Printing Area  max      Print Reproduction Ratio    Print Speed    Print Position Adjustment  Ink Supply   Master Supply Disposal  Master Disposal Capacity    User Interface    High speed digital master making full automatic stencil print
223. press the key or the  key to stop printing      e When checking storage data   Touch  Storage Memory         The Paper Feed Pressure  Adjustment Lever   is set to  CARD    Check if the setting is  consistent   with paper in the  Standard Feed Tray     Symptom    The  Paper Feed Adjustment  under   Administrator Settings  is set to  Auto    and the Paper Feed Pressure  Adjustment Lever is at the  CARD   position      Action    Check the paper and adjust the position  of the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment  Lever as needed    See  Setting up the Paper Feed Tray  and Loading Paper  Step 4    Fp 35      When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue      Alternatively  press the key to  print     When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key to  stop printing              The Print Drum  Cylinder  Type  has been Changed     Select the Current   Print Drum  Cylinder  Type        Symptom   A different type of Print Drum  Cylinder   has been installed      Action    Select the type of Print Drum  Cylinder   currently installed    Alternatively  change back to the same  type of Print Drum  Cylinder  as before    p 211          When changing a setting    In the Confirm Print Drum  Cylinder   Type screen  select the type of Print  Drum  Cylinder  currently installed  and touch  OK     When installing a different Print  Drum  Cylinder     Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder  and  replace with the same one as before     When the Print Drum  Cylinder  is re   i
224. put method  Basic tab   connecting  the USB Flash Drive starts master making   printing process as per the    Process    setting   For detailed settings  refer to the    RISO Printer  Driver User s Guide        Touch  Functions  on the Master  Making Basic Screen     OCC NRCRELCRVENICHE    Basic I Selections   si     Page  A4  Contrast            oe 100        Multi Up  Print EA                         Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List  53    Basic Operations    8 Touch  USB Job List      lO CEU NCR ELC VERGI  Select ions Funct ions f Admin  N    Ca     USB Job List  1  os      1_usb_folder 98MB 90   P 1 1                               Free Area        NewsLetter doc  FaxReport doc  SummaryTable xls    Report doc    ID Print Job i Storage Memory A    The USB Job List Screen  with    Non ID Print     is  displayed     The    ID Print Job    button is displayed on the  screen            9 Touch the data to print     The    USB Job List    Retrieve Screen is displayed     If you are selecting data stored in a different    folder  touch    Cancel     and touch that folder   s tab     Note    e To retrieve the ID print  touch  ID Print Job     e When    Management Level    is set to    Low   Admin tab only    in the    User Management      ID  Print Job  will not be displayed    If the stored data is not shown on the screen   touch  4  or YJ to display it        Confirm the retrieved data     Use the thumbnail to check whether the specified  data is the de
225. r             the initial screen is displayed    The maximum allowable voltage for  USB connector input and output is 5 V   For the USB connections  use a com   mercially available USB cable  that con   forms to the USB 2 0 standard                                         Network connections    e Cable   Ethernet cable  Shielded cable that supports 1OBASE T  or 100BASE TX                                     Important     e Before making the Ethernet connec   tions  turn off the machine and  computer    Note    e The RISO Network Card is required                                               OC  n    14 Connection with a Computer    Before Starting to Use    Software Installation       Before printing from a computer connected to the machine via a USB cable  the RISO Printer Driver must be installed   Before printing from a computer connected to the machine via a network  both the RISO Printer Driver and RISO Net   work Card must be installed  Refer to the Printer Driver User s Guide and RISO Network Card User   s Guide for  instructions on installation     The software supplied with this machine is as follows       RISO Printer Driver    RISO Printer Drivers are for use with RISO Printers only   Before setup  be sure to read the User   s Guide carefully   The User   s Guide can be found as a PDF file  in the CD ROM which came with the RISO Printer      To be able to view PDF format files  it is necessary for either Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader to be    installed   Ado
226. r Disposal Box  To prevent any leak of master documents after printing  the Master Disposal Box can be locked with a padlock so that  no one apart from the administrator of the machine can remove it   Purchase an ordinary padlock whose loop will fit    through the hole  which is 7 mm  9 32   wide                        Status of Protect functions and restrictions       Status of  Protect  functions    Restrictions       Protect  OFF       No restrictions on printer access 1       Padlock  No  Protect  ON    Confidential    message is displayed  Padlock  No Master Disposal Box is locked 2       Protect  OFF  Padlock  Locked    No    Confidential    message is displayed  Nobody but the administrator can dispose of the master        Protect  ON  Padlock  Locked             Confidential    message is displayed  Nobody but the administrator can dispose of the master         1 The ordinary    Confidential    function is available      2 The lock is released if a master jams in the Disposal Unit or if the Master Disposal Box becomes full     182 Keeping Masters Secure After Printing  Protect        Advanced Features    Preventing Leaks of Masters After Creation or Disposal       Turning the Protect Setting ON    Touch  Admin   on the Basic Screen  for each mode     OLEACA VEL CREG    Page  A4  Contrast Size    1    Black       2 Touch  OK      OCC VRCRVELCEEN CH    Resets current settings  once opened    C    0       If the Recognition Screen is displayed  follow the  message on the
227. r Macintosh    Specifications 259    Appendix    Operating Noise Max  66 dB A   when printing 100 sheets per minute    Power Source SE9380A  AC 100 240 V  50 60 Hz  lt 5 0 2 2 A gt   SE9380E  AC 220 240 V  50 60 Hz  lt 2 2 A gt    Power Consumption Max  400 W  100 V  380 W  220 V     At Ready  approx  52 W  100 V  52 W  220 V   At Sleep  approx  3 0 W  100 V  4 0 W  220 V     Functions Idling  Print Speed Adjustment  Silent mode  Confidential mode  Auto   Process  Job Memory  Ink Saving  Layout  Binding Margin  Reservation   Output Reversal  Proof  Double Feed Check  User Management   Management of Consumables  Contrast Adjustment  Print Density  Adjustment  Print Position Adjustment  Tone Curve  Jump Wing Control   Top Margin  Paper Size detection  Renew Page  Dot Process  4 types    Preview  Rotate  Scanning Side  with optional ADF DX 1   Admin  Mode   Interval Printing  Max  Scan  Special Paper Control  Auto 90   Rotation   Protect  Paper Size Selection  Overlay  with optional memory card or USB  Flash Drive   Direct Print  Storage memory  with optional memory card    Scan Mode  with optional memory card or USB Flash Drive   My Direct  Access  ID Counter Report  USB Job List  with USB Flash Drive   Custom  Paper Entry  Programmed Printing  2 types   Direct Access Entry   Selections Entry  Book Shadow  RISO i Quality System  Scanning  Contrast  Manual Auto   Multi Up Print  2 up Single Original Multiple   Original Multi Up Tickets   ADF Semi Auto  with optional ADF unit  in
228. ray with the correct size  paper      Cause 2   A normal size original has been set in  the wrong position      Action   Lift the Platen Cover Pad up and set the  original correctly     To select the Feed Tray   Touch the button of the Feed Tray you  wish to use    To stop the print job    Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the key or  the  3  key to clear         I  Book Shadow Editor  is Not Available   with ADF      Place Original on  Glass Platen     Symptom   Auto Document Feeder is disabled while  Book Shadow function is active      Action   Place the original on the Glass Platen   p 84    Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the  key to clear            Can not use this setting   with current paper   Set the appropriate standard  sized paper on the feeding  tray        Symptom    Binding margin function cannot be used  when custom sized paper is in the  Paper Feed Tray      Action   Load standard size paper in the Paper  Feed Tray        Touch  Close     Alternatively  press the key or the    key to clear            When a Message Displays 233    Troubleshooting       Message    Symptom Action    How to Clear a Pop Up Message       Check Paper Receiving     Symptom       When resuming the print job        Required Ink and  Please Order If Needed       Check Stock of  Required Master and  Please Order If Needed    The remaining quantity of Ink Cartridge  or Master Roll has become less than  specified on    Stock Management      p 171     Action   Order 
229. rectAccess Entry _    Selections Entry    Default Display Priority      Mode Screen          Mode Key Pattern J  Mode Select     Start Up Screen   Logo SE                    2 Touch  OK   4 Touch  Custom Paper Entry      OREA ORV ELVER CH    Resets current settings  once opened           Custom Paper Entry   Display read i   OFF      a          Default Folder Renaming J  System Cl Select J   Internal Cl  Editor Base IP Address J    P 1 5    gt            C    b       ul                If the Recognition Screen is displayed  follow the  message on the screen  See step 2 in    Customiz   ing Default Settings       p 173        178 Registering a Custom Paper Size  Custom Paper Entry     5 Touch an unused button     Close    Custom Paper Entry    Select a Register Frame for a Button       Register U 1 No Entry  D No Entry    No Entry    No Entry       No Entry             Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line   Used buttons are grayed out and are not avail   able     6 Enter the paper size        Close    Custom Paper Entry          Sele  Size Entry Cancel _J __OK          U 1      Feed   _ Ww  L ied   f 100 340                   7  Numeric keypad is   148 555      available for input                     Facing the paper feeding direction  into Feed  Tray   enter W  width  and H  height   Touch  either  4  WE or use Print Quantity Keys     7 Touch  OK    Rename as necessary   Touch  Close  to skip renaming the size     8 Touch  Rename      9 Select a button to rename    
230. reen displays when done     Consumables Information Input Wizard       Ink Information Input   Confirm the input data shown below    Press the START key if those set values are OK    Item Value  LH1  Ink Colour Setting 1   H2  Print Density Fine Adjustment 1   H3  First Print Density Adjustment 1       Press the key to approve selection   Returns to the Basic Screen     Note     e Master Information Input Screen may also display  If so  enter Master Information as well     p 242    Master Information Input Screen    This screen pops up when data could not be obtained from the Master Roll     Touch  OK  and enter values as shown below     OR CN MOM ELCENERICHE    j Master    Cannot Get Consumables Info    Input Values Required             242 When a Message Displays       Troubleshooting                                  Screen Display Description Values    H4  Master Density 1  Light    10  Dark    SOO Select the standard density to be applied   Master Information Input during creation of the master     H4  Master Density   Its    LILII LILY    H5  Print Density Fine Adjustment 1  Light    5  Dark    AEE PANSA Gal NEAR Select a Print Density level to match the   Master Information Input master to fine tune print result     H5  Print Density Fine Adjustment   CIC  Le     H6  First Print Density Adjustment 1  Light    5  Dark     Select a Print Density level of the first print to  Master Information Input match the master   Ee eee eats This can be selected independent of  H5  Pr
231. reproduction ratio  reduction   78   65   61   50   Margint   90   99      60   130 sheets per minute  control panel  five steps variable   180   185 sheets per minute  Touch panel  High Speed      Vertical   15 mm     19 32   Horizontal   10 mm   25 64    Fully automatic  1000 ml per cartridge    Fully automatic  approx  215 sheets per roll    100 sheets    LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators    Specifications 257    Appendix    Optional Accessories    Operating Noise  Power Source    Power Consumption    Functions    Dimensions    Required Space      Weight 2  Safety Standards    Note     Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  Auto Document Feeder DX 1  Color Print  Drum  Cylinder   Auto Control Stacking Tray  Wide Stacking Tray  Key Card  Counter  Job Separator  Document Storage Card DM 128CF DM 512CF   RISO Controller IS300  Stand D type  Stand N type  Card Feed Kit  Envelope  Feed Kit  RISO Printer Driver for Macintosh    Max  66 dB A   when printing 100 sheets per minute   AC 100 240 V  50 60 Hz  lt 5 0 2 2 A gt     Max  400 W  100 V  380 W  220 V   At Ready  approx  52 W  100 V  52 W  220 V   At Sleep  approx  3 0 W  100 V  4 0 W  220 V     Idling  Print Speed Adjustment  Silent mode  Confidential mode  Auto Process   Job Memory  Ink Saving  Layout  Binding Margin  Reservation  Output  Reversal  Proof  Double Feed Check  User Management  Management of  Consumables  Contrast Adjustment  Print Density Adjustment  Print Position  Adjustment  Tone Curve  Jump Wing Contr
232. rien   Right 7    Margin    Ma     Bindino Margin J Preview    i    an Overlay J        Numeric keypad is    available for input                 88 Adjusting the Master Making position  Binding Margin     Functions for Master Making    3 Touch  a  or  J to specify the shift  distance     Note     e Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter a  value       When you touch  Reduction   the image with   out a Shift designated for the Margin mode  becomes the print image and the size is  reduced around the center of the print image so  that the original is completely printed within the  paper     4 Touch  OK      The binding margin shift is set and the Functions  Screen appears     Note     e When you want to cancel the once fixed binding  margin  either press the key or touch  OFF   in step 2  and then touch  OK      Binding margin          Margin     Numeric keypad is    available for input   0 50           Adjusting the Master Making position  Binding Margin  89    Functions for Master Making    Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum  Printing Area  Max  Scan     When a master is made  automatic paper size detection and image size adjustment applies to allow appropriate print  margins  This is to prevent paper jams  and keep the internal roller free of Ink stains    By selecting    Max  Scan     maximum printing area will apply to the scanned image  regardless of the print paper size  or original document size    Be sure to check the sizes of the original document and the
233. riginal to use     Important     e The reproduction size is determined from the page size and printing paper size  When the reproduction size is  not appropriate  an error message is displayed  In such case  use a printing paper of different size or change  the size of the original      Number of images   Set the quantity of originals to be laid out on one sheet of paper    e 2UP      4UP   e 8UP   e 16UP      Original orientation  direction of text on the original   The original orientation is determined by the set number of images  Set the original according to the orientation of  characters on the original seen from the front side     Align Top Align Side    bisses or    AT ae or a                   80 Laying out continuous originals on one sheet of paper  Layout     Functions for Master Making      Layout order    Set the order of the images when the printed paper is placed in the orientation that allows the characters on the  original to be read   Ex   Number of images  8UP  Original orientation  orientation of characters on the original   Align Side    L top toR R top to L       L top to B R top to B       Note     e Depending on the    Number of images    and    Original orientation    settings  the possible settings for    Layout  order    differ     Laying out continuous originals on one sheet of paper  Layout  81    Functions for Master Making    1 Set the original and print paper     Place the original on the Glass Platen or in the  optional ADF unit   To place the
234. rtant     e Before making the adjustment  be sure  to remove all papers from the Paper  Feed Tray and confirm that the tray is  lowered to the bottom        252 Troubleshooting       Troubleshooting          Problem Possible Cause Action  Paper is not smoothly fed from   Paper handling pressure is not   For paper that easily creates paper  the Paper Feed Tray  correctly adjusted  powder  skips  or for the back side of   Skipped paper  or multiple  postcards that is turn up   sheet feeding  Turn the dial to the left                            Normal    Strong     Medium    Weak    2  00 06    e If paper is being multi fed   Turn the dial to the right                          Important      e Before making the adjustment  be sure  to remove all papers from the Paper  Feed Tray and confirm that the tray has  lowered to the bottom        The Paper Feed Adjustment on the   Adjust the    Paper Feed Adj      Contact your  Functions Screen is not properly set    dealer  or authorized service  representative  for details on making the  adjustment        The back of the printed cardis   The angle of the Stripper Plate is in   Turn the Stripper Plate Angle Adjustment  peeling  or the leading edge appropriate Dial to adjust the angle   gets wrinkled           An error message displays Is the lifted paper getting ejected at   Check the printed copy  and if the top  even though there is no paper   the second rotation of the Print Drum   margin is less than 5 mm     1      slightly  jam   C
235. se the Meter Display  Screen  Operate the machine as normal     3  To display and review the Job Count  follow  step 1     3 Touch  Close  to close the window   Returns to the Functions Screen        Showing Usage Status  Meter Display  163    Advanced Features    Customizing the Direct Access Area   My Direct Access     Normally  the functions displayed in the Direct Access Area of the Basic Screen are already registered by the default  setting or can be changed by the administrator  However  if the User Management is set up  each user can register  the functions displayed in the Direct Access Area using    My Direct Access       The functions that can be displayed in the Direct Access Area can individually be registered in each mode  Master  Making Print Scanning     Up to 4 functions can be registered     OCU VECRVELCEIENCH    Page  A4  Cont rast Size Paper           Direct Access Area       My Direct Access    registered by each user can be displayed after the user has been identified and cannot be  changed by other users    Note    e    My Direct Access    can be set when    Management Level    is set to    High Full Management    in    User Management        e If    My Direct Access    is not set  the functions registered via the usual methods are displayed in the Direct Access  Area    p 176     1 Touch  My Direct Access  on the Note   Functions Screen    Consult your administrator for Management  Level     OReady to Make Master Select a mode tab to register new  Selec
236. sed buttons are displayed with a solid line   Used buttons are grayed out and are not avail   able     Note     e If you pressed the key to open the  screen  first touch  Register  then select an  available button        Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory  141    Advanced Features    Renaming a Job Memory       1 Touch  Job Memory  on the Func   tions Screen     OREA OVEL ERGI    Functions    Job Memory J Multi Up Print J    2 Up          C                 2 Touch  Rename    Job Memory       Select a Button Name to be Changed    Register 1    F    Retrieve    Rename    Si                   3 Select a Job Memory to rename        Job Memory    Select a Button Name to be Changed    Register  a M 1  Retrieve 2   M 2                Rename    Clear    BLL             Unregistered buttons are grayed out and are not    available     142 Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory        4 Touch character buttons to enter a  new name        Rename  cance JC o   Dogga monna             LYOILILILY DJL IC  IIL Le  UOA WO             Change capitalization by selecting  Small  or   Capital  button   p 136    Note     To clear the current name  touch button or    press the key   5 When entered  touch  OK      Rename  en wi             RISO NEWS E    ema  OLLILA IJ  CC      LOLI CL LL  LILLJ Leb  LILI Le LLU                   Returns to the Job Memory Screen  The name is updated     Advanced Features    6 Touch  Close      Job Memory Clase     Select a Button Name to be Changed               
237. selected        106 Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl     Functions for Printing    Saving Settings and Renaming the Parameter Names in the  Parameter List       1 Touch  Special Paper Ctrl  on the 4 Touch  Entry Call    Functions Screen   Special Paper Ctrl       Select Print Quantity  Selections W Functions    Entrv Call J  Paper Feed Adj   STY v  S   4 Paper Feed A int       Idling Action   Paper Eject Adj Air Blow  4 Separation Fan  Confident ial J i Pre suction Fan  Special Paper Ctr     Ce  oe Parameter List Screen is displayed                    J Adjust  Paper Feed Adj   and  Paper 5 Touch an unused button   Eject Adj         Note  Parameter List  e For details of adjustments  see  p 105  Select a Register Frame for a Button  i  3 Confirm the adjustments on the Spe        cial Paper Ctrl Screen        Special Paper Ctrl             Entry Call      S Tray Upper Limit     Pea  Paper Feed Adj    sie Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line     Paper Feed Amount    Used buttons are grayed out and are not avail       Air Blow  Paper Eject Adj   able   3 Separation Fan  Pre suction Fan    Suction Fan 6 Touch  OK      Special Paper Ctrl    Pa Close                      al i Registered  OK           Cancel   Cx                  Paper Feed Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types  Jump Wing Control   Special Paper Ctrl  107    Functions for Printing    Returns to the Parameter List after th
238. sers of this  machine   e Rename Group  Change the group name   e Reset Counter  Reset all user counters for master making printing   Recognized by  Set the Recognition and Identification System     p 114       Protect  Determine the    Protect    setting      p 182    OFF  ON       Auto Idling   Select whether to perform    Auto Idling    when making a  master after a set period of non use    Also selects a period of non use before initiating    Auto  Idling     as well as the number of idle rotations     Auto Idling  OFF ON  Non Use Time  1 12 hour  Rotation   1 3  times        Auto Page Renewal   Allows you to set when to recreate a new master  Once  the specified number of copies reached  the master in  use is automatically discarded and a new one is  created    You can also specify the number of proof copies to  make after recreating the master     Auto Page Renewal  OFF  ON    Auto Renewal Point   1 9999 copies  Factory default  is 1000 copies    Sample Copy Output   0 99 copies  Factory default is  3 copies        Minimum Print Q   ty   Set minimum number of copies to print    This prevents creation of master when a smaller  quantity is entered for printing     Important      e This setting can be locked to prevent alteration   Consult your dealer  or authorized service  representative  for details     OFF ON  2 99 copies           Stock Management   In order to check current stock quantity  insert the  number of consumables purchased    When stock quantity falls below
239. sired data or not     Storage Retrieve Cancel   _Retrieve _       document 1 doc   Owner  Admn                   Format  A4 Date amp Time  Nov22 XX 10 58       Al   Pages  3 3 Ascend    Color Black                            Preview      From the    USB Job List    Retrieve Screen  you can  confirm retrieved data and specify output settings   See  p 196 for operational details        Touch  Retrieve      The data is retrieved and the following screen  appears     OREA OREL ERGI  Basic     NewsLetter doc   P  172    Owner  RISO Preview  Date amp Time  Nov25 XX 19 04  Ervin J  Skip Page    Format  A4    Paper           Process   Auto process    OFF     3   Separation   Gy Black Pause J Binfo J          Note     e You can change the output directions and stop  timing settings on the Master Making Basic  Screen    For details  see    p 26 and  p 55     12 Enter the number of copies using  the Print Quantity Keys     The entered number is displayed on the Print  Quantity Display     13 Press the key     Data is printed   After this  follow the same operations for paper  documents     54 Printing from a Computer Data  Direct Print   USB Job List     Basic Operations    Changing Output Directions       Output can be controlled from the Master Making Print Basic Screens     OREA OELG EDG      Master Making Basic Screen      Preview   Document_1 doc   P 1 4 Paper      king im f th rrentl Owner  RISO Preview    You can check the master making image of the page currently   ree eee XX 05
240. st continue to use the Glass Platen  to scan the rest of the document    To scan the original with the optional ADF unit  and use the    Single Original     you need to set  the original twice     Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet  2 Up   Multi Up Print  77    Functions for Master Making    Note     e When    Multiple Original    is used in Multi Up  Print  the actual number of pages to be scanned  is specified  In the case that the actual number  of pages in the document is less than the num   ber of pages specified in the mode settings  set  an equivalent number of blank pages in the  machine to make up for the specified number or  press the tkey in the status of waiting for  the next original  Master making starts       p 72    Original Orientation and Print Results     When using the    Auto Process    setting  printing  will continue automatically when an original is  set on the ADF unit    To cancel a    Multi Up Print    setting once it has  been confirmed  follow step 2  touch  OFF  and  then  ON  on the screen     Single Original             Functions for Master Making    Operation for Multi Up Tickets       For    Multi Up Tickets     the specification of the short edge size of the original  the width  is used to calculate the num   ber of images that can be printed on one sheet of paper  print paper size divided by short edge size of the original    A ticket width of between 50 mm  2   and 210 mm  84 16   can be specified    Ex     Short edge of the original
241. stalled   Energy Saving Mode  Auto Sleep  Auto Power OFF   ECO  Mode    Dimensions When in use   1415 mm W  x 705 mm D  x 665 mm H   5529 32  W  x 273 4  D  x 263 46   H    When in storage   780 mm W  x 705 mm D  x 665 mm H   3023 32  W  x 273 4  D  x 263 46   H      Required Space   1655 mm  W  x 1310 mm  D  x 1505 mm  H    65 5 32   W  x 51 946   D  x 59 1 4   H     Weight 2 Approx  115 kg  254 Ib    Safety Standards IEC 60950 1 compliant  Indoor  pollution degree 23  At altitudes of 2000 m  or lower   Note     e Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine  some images and explanations in this manual  may not correspond to your machine     e The specifications are subject to change without prior notice    1 The height includes the height of the dedicated stand    2 The weight does not include Ink and Master      3 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air  Degree    2    corresponds to general  indoor environment     260 Specifications    Appendix    Specifications 261    262    Index    Symbols   PURO cs ea Bn Lech to hs Se to eh 24  132  Gude A   ieee eer peeiner trerser ste rer tne nce rr empress 24  132  ROY echo E AE E ioe E ee Sh ae a da 24  132  Numerics   CN oes a OB AE E cnet aca tS 71  75  A   ADE COVE Para cease hates 23  229  230  ADF Original Guide            cceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 23  ADF Original Guides 0 0    ce eeeeceeereeeeeereeteeeeees 23  ADF Original Receiving Tray    a   se 23  ADF Origina
242. stration mark     Important     e When you are setting the    Size     magnify reduce using the area that skips the set value   e Do not use    Auto Reproduction Size       e This function cannot be used with    Multi Up Print    or    2 Up        1 Place an original  4 Touch  a  or  J to specify the cut  Place the original face down on the Glass Platen  width   Align center on the top edge  and close Platen  Cover    p 41        ORCA ORVET CAVER GI                             Top Margin  ce J   2 Touch  Top Margin  on the Func  ETAT  tions Screen  originals can be cut Bj  by a specified range  OFF i   O Ready to Make Master aE    fon     Functions  0 99    Top Margin     DERG    Numeric keypad is available for input              r Note     e Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter a value     You can set from 0 to 99 mm  0 0  to 3 9                5 Touch  OK      Returns to the Functions Screen     Top Margin     setting is updated     3 Touch  ON          O Readv to Make Master  3 Top Margin Cancel   OK      The top margin of  originals can be cut  gt   by a specified range  EE i     0 99                        Nume  keypad is available for input              Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and Printing  Top Margin  87    Functions for Master Making    Adjusting the Master Making position   Binding Margin     You can make a master by putting the binding margin on either the top  bottom  left and right of the original  The  adjustable range is from 0 to 50 mm  
243. t Paper eteeni tte ee 16  36  Print Paper Handling s es 17  Print Paper Setting 2 00    eeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34  Print Position Adjustment           c ceceeeeeeeeeeneees 100  Print Position Adjustment Keys    n    24  Print Quantity Display   00 0 0    eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 24  102  Print Quantity Keys  0 to 9 Keys     aaeeea 24  45  Print Speed ni anat ii 24  96  167  Print Speed Adjustment Indicator   0 0 0    24  Print Speed Adjustment Keys            ecee 24  96  Print Speed Indicator           ccccececesseeeesteeees 24  96  Printer Exterior              ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 220  Printing Cautions          cece eeceeeteeereeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19  Printing from Computer                      seeeeee 32  48  Printing from Paper Document                 0  31  43  PrOC SS EE E EE E EA a oe ee hee ee 32  Program  enai laine inte 129  132  Progress AMOWS       cccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeees 25  Proof meae ee 45  102  Proof CODY aaeeea atate aeieea ato dap aiana 45  102  Proof Key sininen tenien i i e ee 25  102  Protect   Kanra an a ee ath tee 171  182  Push Out Lever     cc cccccectecceeccteenecctesnesenecetereees 209  R   Receive Tray          cceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeesceeseneeenseneeeteeees 112  Receiving Tray Paper Guides              21  37  38  39  Receiving Tray Paper Guides    Opening Button    22  Recognition and Identification System                 117  Recognition Screen                 ccceeeeeetteeeeeees 30  46  Recognized b
244. t ions    Funct ions buttons     Special Paper Ct rij ID Counter Report         My Direct Access  Printing    Ca  P 5 5    Framel fie  Frame3 Frame4          Mult i Up   D Feed   B   5      Print   Check No Entry   No Perr        If    Management Level    is not set to    High Full  Management    in    User Management     the  My  Direct Access  button is grayed out and is not  available           164 Customizing the Direct Access Area  My Direct Access     Advanced Features    3 Select a button to assign a function 6 Touch  OK      to  Returns to the Functions Screen     My Direct Access  Printing    Framel Frame2 Frames Frame4    D Feed       If the button has a function already assigned to it   the newly selected function will overwrite the pre   vious one     4 Select a function to assign     Function List    Confident ial Auto Page Renewal    Special Paper Ctrl    Ink Saving Job Separation  I    High Speed       Note    e Touch CE or to display more func   tions  if necessary    e To remove a function that is accidentally  assigned  touch  No Entry     e Functions already assigned are grayed out and  are not available    e Some functions are displayed only when  optional devices are installed     5 Touch  OK      Returns to    My Direct Access    Screen  The  selected functions are added    To add more functions or to replace a button with  another function  repeat steps 3 to 6        Customizing the Direct Access Area  My Direct Access  165    Advanced Features    Chang
245. t to    High Full Management     each user can set the functions displayed in the  Direct Access Area  My Direct Access   p 164    176 Setting Up Direct Access Area and Selections Tab  DirectAccess Entry   Selections Entry     Advanced Features    In the following steps  the registration on DirectAccess Entry and Selections Entry are explained at the same time     1 Touch  DirectAccess Entry  or   Selections Entry  on the Admin   Screen     Admin     Directdccess Entry    Selections Entry       Display  Default Display Priority     Mode Screen    System Start Up Screen     Rogo  SE        Editor Display Adjustment          2 Select a mode tab to store new but   tons     DirectAccess Entry  Printing    Framel Frame    Framed    ie  Multi Up D Feed  No Entry l No Entry         3 Select a button to assign a function     DirectAccess Entry    MasterMake Printing    Frame1 Frame2 Frame3 Frame4      Multi Up D Feed  Print No Entry   No Entry q       If the button has a function already assigned to it   the newly selected function will overwrite the pre   vious function        4 Select a function to assign        Function List    No Entry          Paper Feed Adj  Ink Saving    n  n    D Feed Check    Idling Action    Confidential    Re age       Auto Page Renewal    P  3 4 C gt         a       Note     Touch  a   or    gt   to display more func     tions  if necessary    To remove a function accidentally assigned   touch  No Entry     Functions already assigned are grayed out and  n
246. tative  for details           Display 27    Getting Acquainted    About Modes       Touch the Mode button on the Mode Screen to view the Basic Screens of the various modes           Select an Operation Mode         RISOSE980A   SE9380A    2      MasterMake   Scanning                 A  RISO Print    On the Operation Screen displayed after selecting the Print Mode  you can select the operation of the machine     the operation that you are going to perform         Select an Operation Mode      RISOSE9380A   SE9380A    Q    l MasterMake   Scanning    Printing         1  Master Make    Scan the original set on the Glass Platen and make  a master     2     28 Display       Printing   Print with the master currently on the Print Drum   Cylinder   Select  Printing  when the master mak   ing operation is not required further after the com   pletion of master making     Getting Acquainted    B  Scan Mode  This mode scans the original set on the Glass Platen and stores the scanned data in Storage Memory     OReady to scan data    Page No 1    File Name scan_0001   Owner  Directory 1_folder    Owner 1_    Basic             Page  B4  Contrast Size Format    Auto 6    Book    This setting is available when the optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash Drive is attached     The data in Storage Memory can be edited using Editor functions   See    Converting Hard copies into Stored Data  Scan Mode      p 188  for information on the Scan Mode        Display 29    Getting Acquainted    Note 
247. te       If you touch  OFF Delete   all settings set in  User Management will be deleted and returned  to the factory settings     118 Setting Up User Management  User Management           7 Touch  OK      CAUTION  All registered  users and configurations  which belongs to the user  management will be deleted    Cm    Returns to the User Management Screen      Recognized by    is updated     Continue User Management settings  See the  subsequent pages     Advanced Features    Setting Up the Management Level       Important    e Set    Recognized by    in advance    p 117   1 Display the User Management 4 Touch  OK    Screen  Returns to the User Management Screen   Follow steps 1 to 4 in    Selecting Recognition and    Management Level    is updated   Identification System      p 117   You can continue registering users and renaming   groups if needed   2 Touch  Management Level   To close the User Management settings  touch     Close  on the User Management Screen to  return to the Admin  Screen     User Management    Select management level    Management Level    High Full Management    Input user i group information    Reset all counters Select recognition method    Reset Counter Recognized by         3 Touch the button to select the    Man   agement Level    option     Management Level       High Full Management    Mid ID Print Only    Low Adm ny  Only         See  p 114 for details about Management Level  options        Setting Up User Management  User Management  119    
248. ted  and enable adjustment in  0 1 mm  1 254   increments  When    Fine Adjust Mode    is  OFF  adjustments will be in 0 5 mm  1 64   increments     Select Print Quantity  Selections Functions    Confidential  Fine Adjust Mode Ink Saving    D Feed Check Interval I  Idling Action Paper Interposal    P  3 4          Functions for Printing       Adjusting the Print Position  Print Position Adjustment  101    Functions for Printing    Printing Proof Copies  Proof     After making adjustments to the print position or density  check the print quality in a proof copy   Proof copies are not counted towards the number of copies displayed on the Print Quantity Display     Note   The machine will continue to print proof copies if the key is held down     Press the key     Print Quantity Display                   eee  ADD     CIMO       PROOF                Proof Key    A single proof copy is printed        102 Printing Proof Copies  Proof     Functions for Printing    Prevent Paper Jams When Using Special  Paper  D Feed Check     This printer monitors for multiple paper feeds  If a feed of more than one sheet is detected  the print job automatically  stops and    D Feed Check    is executed    The multiple paper feed detector is calibrated for normal print paper  Depending on the type of paper used  double  feeding may be detected and an error displayed even when one sheet of paper is properly supplied  In the following  instances  please set    D Feed Check    to    OFF        e When a
249. the  USB Flash Drive  This will cause data to disap   pear and the USB malfunctioning     Note     e When the remaining free space of the USB  Flash Drive is limited  the following message is  displayed  Touch  USB Job List  to organize  the data of USB Flash Drive  or touch  Cancel   to cancel copying moving     The file size is too large   to store on USB flash drive  Change the USB flash drive  or delete some files   to make spaces             200 Copying Moving Stored Data       Storing Original Data and Use Method    Copying Moving Stored Data 201    Replacing Consumables    Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables    The machine checks and reports on remaining amount of Ink  master  paper  as well as the space left in the master  disposal box    Note    e The report may not be displayed if detection fails    e The reported amount is for reference only and may not be perfectly accurate      Ifthe Ink or master is depleted or the Master Disposal Box is full  a warning message is displayed and the machine             stops   1 Touch  i Info  on the Basic Screen    B Display Details  ORE VRCRVELCHNENGH Indi  ator Message Description  7 M  Page A4  Contrast Size Feed Tray    _    Ex           iito approximately 10  left  coom                Unknown   Indicates that consumable  E            data is not available  is not  no display set  etc   Print Check    iG  Black Eue J n j   About the    My Counter    Screen    When the    Management Level    in the User Manage   ment is
250. the Ink Cartridge specifically  designed and approved for use with this  machine      p 207    Important         If the error persists after replacing the  Ink Cartridge  check for proper  installation of the Ink Cartridge        No Master  Replace Master Roll       The Master Roll is depleted        Install a new Master Roll    Use Master Roll specifically designed and  approved for use with this machine    p 204       When a Message Displays 225          Troubleshooting    D00 000 Installation Error  in alphabetical order        Message    Possible Cause    Action       Close Front Cover    The Front Cover is open or  improperly closed     Check for the magnet underneath the  Front Cover and firmly close        Close Master Making Unit Cover    The Master Making Unit Cover  is open or is improperly  installed     Pull out the Master Making Unit  check  and firmly close its cover        Close the ADF Cover    Optional Auto Document  Feeder DX 1 cover is open or  incorrectly set     Check the ADF Cover and close it firmly        Install Ink Cartridge    The Ink Cartridge is improperly  installed or is missing     Properly install the Ink Cartridge    p 207       Master Making Unit has been  Unlocked    The Master Making Unit is  ready to be pulled out     Pull out the Master Making Unit        Print Drum has been Unlocked    The Print Drum  Cylinder  is  ready to be pulled out     Pull out the Print Drum  Cylinder         Print Drum Not Set in Place   Press Drum   Release But
251. the first several copies with faint Ink after the Print Drum  Cylinder   has been exchanged or the machine has not been used for an extended period of time  Idling action before the mas   ter making process assures consistent print quality from the beginning     Important         Idling Action    is effective only in conjunction with the master making process  When performing print processes  only     Idling Action    will have no effect     Note    e To perform    Idling Action    automatically when making a master after a specified period of time since the last print  job  set    Auto Idling    on the Admin  Screen   p 171    1 Touch  Idling Action  on the Func     tions Screen     ORCE OR ECEN G    Selections W Functions  Strage Memory   Confidential      Editor       Ink Saving    5    Interval    Paper Interposal    P  3 4       D Feed Check  Idling Action              z          Ca    appears on screen     Press the key     After    Idling Action    has been finished  the master     making process starts     Note   e If D displays in the screen message area    even though it is not set  this indicates that the     Auto Idling    time has elapsed  If you make a  master in this status     Idling Action    is executed      ORCEUNRORVELCE EES       Selections Functions      Remember to load the originals before pressing  as the master will be made immediately    after    Idling Action    finishes        Advanced Features    Idling Action  Idling Action  149    Advanced Feat
252. the machine is unable to retrieve matching  data from the consumable  you must enter the  correct setting value    p 241       Replacing Consumables    Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables 203    Replacing Consumables    Replacing the Master Roll    When the Master Roll is depleted  a message is displayed and the machine stops  Replace with a new Master Roll     Important      e For the Master Roll  it is recommended to use the products specified by RISO     e Keep the power ON while replacing the master     1 Open the Front Cover                    2 Check the indicator of the Master  Making Unit Release Button is ON                    Master Making  Unit Release Button  Y A                               If the indicator is off  press the Master Making Unit  Release Button to turn it on     Important     e When the Print Drum  Cylinder  is out  Master  Making Unit cannot be pulled out  Return the  Print Drum  Cylinder  into position and press  the Master Making Unit Release Button   p 211    204 Replacing the Master Roll       3 Pull out the Master Making Unit        T 2 T I   Master Making Unit                                  ward                       Pull out slowly until it stops     4 Open the Master Making Unit Cover              ae  Master Making Unit aM D wl  we ae   Master Making Unit Cover Lever  A                              Grasp the Master Making Unit Cover Lever and    open the Master Making Unit Cover     5 Open the Master Roll Holder     Master Roll Ho
253. the optional ADF unit   e you want to save at a size that differs from the size of the original    When the standard sized original is set in the optional ADF unit  the original size is detected automatically  The orig   inal is saved by original format     Touch  Format  on the Scan Basic 3 Touch  OK      Screen  The paper size is confirmed and the screen  returns to the Scan Basic Screen     OReady to scan data    Page No 1    File Name scan_0001 Owner  Basic                Page A4  Contrast Size    B Auto a        Book    The Format Screen appears        2 Touch the paper size button to be  set     Page Size       If you select  Auto   the same size as the original  will automatically be set   Note     e When Format is set to    Auto     you cannot select     Auto    under the Size        192 Converting Hard copies to Stored Data  Scan Mode     Storing Original Data and Use Method    Retrieving Stored Data and Printing     Storage Memory  USB Job List     Retrieving and printing stored data     Retrieving Stored Data       When retrieving the USB Flash Drive data  connect the USB Flash Drive to the USB slot in advance  For details on  how to print USB Flash Drive data  see  p 48    Printing from a Computer Data        Note     e When    User Management    is set up by the administrator  the users will be asked to identify themselves during the    operation  For details  refer to    p 114     e When    Recognized by    is set to    PIN Code    in User Management and the USB
254. ton and Pull Out Print Drum  after the Button Lights    The Print Drum  Cylinder  is  locked but not pushed in  properly     Press the Print Drum  Cylinder  Release  Button  Remove the Print Drum  Cylinder   after the button is lit and reinstall        Rear Cover of Main Body is Off  Call Service    The machine rear cover is  removed     Contact your dealer  or authorized service  representative         Set Master Disposal Box in Place    The Master Disposal Box is  improperly set or is missing     Properly set the Master Disposal Box    p 209       Set Master in Place    No master is installed     Install a Master Roll   p 204       Set Master Making Unit in Place    The Master Making Unit is  missing or is improperly installed     Properly install the Master Making Unit   p 204       Set Print Drum  Cylinder  in Place    The Print Drum  Cylinder  is  improperly set or is missing     Properly install the Print Drum  Cylinder    p 211       Wrong type Ink Cartridge Installed  or Cannot Read Ink Info   Replace Ink Cartridge   or Contact dealer  or authorized  service representative  Riso office       Incorrect type or color of the Ink  Cartridge is installed     Properly install a correct Ink Cartridge   p 207    Important      e Use the Ink Cartridge specifically  designed and approved for use with this  machine  Failure to do so may cause  problems or damage to the machine           The label on the Ink Cartridge  outlet surface has come off or  surface is with dirt        T
255. tput  settings    See  p 196 for operational details     Note     e Touch the  Preview  when you want to enlarge  and confirm the thumbnail        194 Retrieving Stored Data and Printing  Storage Memory  USB Job List     Storing Original Data and Use Method    Changing the Data Order       You can change the order of the storage data displayed on the storage data Selection Screen     Note     The factory setting is    Date Descend        1 Touch  View edit   3 Touch  OK      Note  Returns to the Storage Selection Screen  USB    Job List Screen    e  View edit  is inactive if there is no storage      data USB Flash Drive data or only one stored  item     Storage Selection                1   e2  n  m  e  1_folder                            document 1 doc  FAX cover doc  Newsletter_P2  Images       View edit J ID Print Job H USB Job List         On the View Edit Screen  touch the  button of the order you want         View edit    In which order to show the list    Owner Date  A 3  Ascend Ascend  File Name Owner Date  Descend Descend Descend    File name only    File Name    Ascent                Note     e By using ON  inverted  OFF of  File name  only   the data display format can be switched  on the Storage  USB  Selection Screen     OFF  File Name   Owner Name   Date  ON  inverted   File Name       Retrieving Stored Data and Printing  Storage Memory  USB Job List  195    Storing Original Data and Use Method       Using the Storage Retrieve USB Job List Screen       Each secti
256. tting for printing cut and   pasted pencil drawings with shadows                 3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen   Image Processing mode is updated     Note     e Some functions are not available in certain  Image Processing mode settings                                            Line Photo Duo Pencil  Dot Process   Y Vv    Contrast  Auto  Vv              Contrast  1 5  Y Y Y Y  Contrast Adj     Y          Tone Curve     Y Y Y  y   available       not available    e In  Line  mode  when  Contrast  is set to   Auto   the background color of the original is  automatically deleted      p 60       Functions for Master Making    Selecting Image Processing Mode  Image  59    Functions for Master Making    Selecting Scanning Contrast for the Original   Contrast     Scanning contrast can be adjusted to accommodate background color or Ink density of the original   Specify by selecting Auto or numeric levels  1 5    In the Auto mode     Contrast    is automatically adjusted to the background color of the original for printing     Important      e    Auto    is available only when Image Processing mode has been set to    Line      p 58    Note     e Default Scanning Contrast can be set on the Admin  Screen   p 167    Touch  Contrast  on the Master Mak  3 Touch  OK      ing Basic Screen  Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen      Contrast    is updated     OCCU ACRE CEE GI  Basic    Page  A4  Contrast Size Paper        nl oe   Multi Up i  Print        2 To
257. turns to the Program List Screen  The program  is deleted     138 Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program        Advanced Features    Making changes to Stored Programs       Retrieve a program to modify     Follow steps 1 and 3 in    Retrieving a Program       p 137      Make changes to the Program   Modify the number of copies or sets in the current  screen    Note     e See    Setting Up for Programed Printing       p 132  for details on how to set up a pro   gram     3 Touch  Revise         Single Page Mode Cancel J  __OK__        Program A JTotal   1146    G Cps  Sets   G Cps  Sets Entry Call    L50  x B  Lss  Revise                         TE i       Gl                                           4 Touch  OK         Single Page Mode  Eas      Program A    vc   This Setting will be    Revised  zef OK        E Prog                 kal Cancel j ox    a    Returns to the Program Screen     Program    set   tings are updated  overwritten               Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program  139    Advanced Features    Using Job Memory Functions  Job Memory     Save the settings of the last print job into    Job Memory     Simply retrieve those    Job Memory    settings when doing a  similar print job  Up to 10 jobs can be saved   The following attributes can be saved to    Job Memory          MasterMaking Print                               Image Multi Up Print Print Position Auto Page Renewal  Dot Process Layout Paper Feed Adj  Scanning Side ADF   Contrast Top Margin D Feed Che
258. u can print faster than you can by simply adjusting the    Print Speed      If the following conditions are satisfied  the machine prints at a speed of about 185 sheets minute  If the conditions    are not met  the machine prints at a speed of about 180 sheets minute     e Internal temperature of the Print Drum  Cylinder  when printing starts is 20  C  68  F  or higher    e Print paper size is a standard size of A4 Letter or smaller  e Vertical shift of the print position is within  10 mm  25 64      e    Interval Printing    is not set    Important      When the internal temperature of the Print Drum  Cylinder  is below 15  C  59  F    High Speed  is grayed out and    cannot be used  Use the normal print speed adjustment  1 to 5  until the internal temperature of the machine is  higher than 15  C  59  F   The time it takes for the internal temperature to rise depends upon the machine environ     ment     Touch  High Speed  on the Print Basic  Screen        Select Print Quantity    Print Position Paper        Zu       a  Vv  D Feed  Check   3  Black E Idle j B info J    Print speed is set at    High Speed    and the Print Speed  indicator on the Control Panel is off     Note       To slow down printing speed from  High Speed    touch  High Speed  again or set the speed with the      key on the Control Panel     By registering to the DirectAccess area  you can set     High Speed    by a single touch during the printing  process    p 164    Paper jams may occur more often  depe
259. u to rotate the displayed image 90 degrees  Shrinks the preview display each time it is touched   2  Displays the size of the current display  5  Show All Button  3  Enlarge Button Shows the entire image   Magnifies the preview display each time it is touched  6  Scroll Button    The image moves in the direction of the displayed arrow     Checking and Printing the Preview Display       The operational procedures for    Printing from the Original Document    are explained below     1 Place an original  4 Press the key     2 Touch  Preview  on the Functions  Screen        ORECA ORUE CVEN    Selections Functions KPS    A scan of the original begins  and can be pre     Top Margin   ADF Semi Auto   viewed on the Preview Screen   Binding Margin J Preview             Max  Scan 0 4    Ca   P  2 4       Preview    setting is updated           Make necessary settings   Make various settings as needed        Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master  Preview  93    Functions for Master Making    5 Check the preview image        Preview        3      5     G       a                3  25   OO  el S14      6 Touch  Continue      A master is created   After this  please follow the same operations for  normally making a master     Note    e Touching  Cancel  will cancel the image   returning to the Master Making Basic Screen   To resume preview operation  repeat from  step 3        94 Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master  Preview     Functions for Master Making    Checking t
260. uantity Keys     Press the G   key or the key     Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to enter the  number of copies for each original     Note         and keys can also move the    entry box from top to bottom    To cancel or change a number  press the  key and enter again    To clear all  number of copies and number of  sets   touch  Clear All     The total number of all copies to be printed is  shown on the top of the screen     Important      To save the current Programed Printing set   tings  touch  Entry Call     Once  OK  is touched  the setting cannot be  saved    See    Saving Programs      p 134  for further  information     Touch  OK      Returns to the original screen  Ready to print in  accordance with the program     Note    e Alternatively  after entering the number of cop     ies    or sets  press the key to start printing    without touching  OK         Advanced Features    Automatic Sorting Into Groups  Program  133    Advanced Features    Saving Programs       Store frequently used Program settings for later use and printing   A total of 12 settings  Single or Multiple Mode  can be stored     1 Create and enter Programed Printing  settings     Follow steps 1 3 in    Setting Up for Programed  Printing     p 132      2 Touch  Entry Call  on the Program  Screen     Single Page Mode  ahi     Program A  Total 1280                                                                Program List    Select a Register Frame for a Button    Reiter   Clear                          
261. uch the desired contrast or   Auto                              ORECA ETON ER GI    Contrast Cancel   OK                                       Levels of scanning contrast             1    Very Light  2  L    Light   3    t Standard  4  E  Dark             5  E  very Dark    60 Selecting Scanning Contrast for the Original  Contrast     Functions for Master Making    Enlarging Reducing Originals   Standard Ratio   Margin    Auto   Free   Zoom     The document can be printed enlarged or reduced  The following methods can be used to enlarge reduce the origi   nal     Standard Ratio   Enlarging or reducing a standard sized original  A4  B5  Letter  Legal etc   to print in another standard size     Margin    Reducing the original slightly  This feature is useful when allowing binding margins  or when text or diagram   extends beyond the printing area    p 19   Specify reduction rate of 90  99  on the Admin  Screen    p 169   Note     e    Margin     and    Standard Ratio    can be selected at the same time       Auto  The original can be automatically enlarged or reduced to according to the paper size in the Paper Feed Tray     Free    The top bottom and left right of the original can be magnified or reduced and printed as desired   Specify the zoom ratio between 50  and 200  in increments of 1        Zoom    Allows you to specify numerical resize ratio   Specify the zoom ratio between 50  and 200  in increments of 1      Note       To avoid paper jam  flipping or Ink smudges on th
262. um   Cylinder     p 211  2  Return the Print Drum  Cylinder  in place     3  Press the key        Paper Jam  Remove Paper in Indicated Areas  and Press  OK  Button    Paper jammed in indicated  area     1  Remove the jammed paper     2  Press the E  key or touch  OK         Safety SW on Paper Feed Tray  is Activated  Reset paper on Paper Feed Tray    The safety switch for the Paper  Feed Tray has been activated     Check underneath the Paper Feed Tray  and on top of the printing paper for any  obstructions  Remove if any exists        System Error in Master Making Unit  Take Out Master and then  Close Master Making Unit Cover          The cutter mechanism for the  master malfunctioned        Pull out the Master Making Unit and  remove the master    p 204   Closing the Master Making Unit Cover will  reset the error  Setup the master again        B00 000 Optional Device Error  in alphabetical order        Message    Possible Cause    Action       Can not identify      Something other than a USB  Flash Drive is connected to  the USB slot        A defective USB Flash Drive    is connected to the USB slot        A USB Flash Drive not  recognized by this machine is  connected to the USB slot     Connect a USB Flash Drive for this  machine   p 46       Can not identify  USB hub     A USB hub is connected to the  USB slot     Connect the correct corresponding USB  Flash Drive   p 46       Insert Card in Key Card Counter          No card in the Key Card  Counter  option         Insert
263. ures    Reproducing the Master     Renew Page  Auto Page Renewal     The data from the last master making process is temporarily stored on the machine    Using this data  another master can be reproduced without repeating steps to scan the same original    You can    Rotate    the original and recreate a master       Auto Page Renewal    is a function that automatically recreates a master when a specified number of pages are  printed  If you are printing a large volume job of thousands or tens of thousands of copies  the master may degrade  before the job is completed    If you set    Auto Page Renewal    to    ON    prior to starting a large volume print job  a master will be automatically rec   reated when the specified number of copies is reached  Auto Renewal Point   This allows you to maintain a consis   tent print quality from start to finish     Note     e    Renew Page    works with data sent from a computer as well  However  if multiple pages exist  only the last page  will be processed with    Renew Page        The    Renew Page    function is not available in the following conditions     immediately after startup   after pressing the key   after executing    Auto Clear        Changing Default settings     p 170    after performing    Confidential          when an error has occurred during master making       after master making for Data Output Mode  when the optional Key Card Counter is installed      e When    Renew Page    or    Auto Page Renewal    is selected  
264. ust enable it in    Admin     prior to use    If    Auto Page Renewal    is activated and    Auto Page Renewal    is set to    ON        Auto Page Renewal    can be executed  during a print job    Important     If    Auto Page Renewal    is not activated in    Admin         Auto Page Renewal    cannot be set to    ON       p 171   The    Auto Page Renewal    is set to    OFF    in the following instances         When printing with    Program           When the or the   lt   is pressed        When attempting to process the next job with direct print    Note     e The factory settings are such that a master is recreated every 1000 copies  with a setting to print 3 proofs  This set   ting can be changed in    Admin      p 171    Turning ON    Auto Page Renewal       Touch  Auto Page Renewal  on the Func   tions Screen     Select Print Quantity    Selections Functions    Auto Page Renewal     m  Job Separation    CO eu D       Auto Page Renewal    is activated    When you print with these settings     Auto Page  Renewal    will be executed after the specified number of  copies are printed     Note        If  Auto Page Renewal  is grayed out  go to    Admin      and turn    Auto Page Renewal    ON   p 171                152 Reproducing the Master  Renew Page  Auto Page Renewal     Advanced Features    Print the original from the last page   Output reversal     By reversing the page order of the originals of several pages in length  print the originals from the last page     CA In 
265. utton  for most functions      6 Touch CH     Returns to the original Basic Screen     Changing Default Settings  Admin   175    Advanced Features    Setting Up Direct Access Area and  Selections Tab   DirectAccess Entry   Selections Entry     Frequently accessed functions for each mode can be placed on    Direct Access    area in the Basic Screen  or on     Selections    Screen    This allows quick changes and direct access to each function s Setup Screens  eliminating the need to search from  a long list of functions    Each mode  Master Making Print Scanning  is capable of storing its own unique settings              Basic Screen Master Make Print Scanning  Direct Access 4 4 4  Selections 9 9                        O Ready to Make Master  Basic    Page A4  Contrast Size Paper        ORCE ORV ELCA ERGI  Selections    Renew interval  Page   nterva            tinl e    Multi Up D Feed  Print Check    ie Black Bide J  E into J     Confiden  Contrast  tial   Adj  Book      Shee   Job Memor    Direct Access Area Selections Screen                      Note   Choose functions that are relevant to each mode     The machine comes with factory default    Direct Access    area and    Selections    Screen entries  which can be  changed     Any function available in the    Functions    Screen can be selected    Optional attachment is automatically added to the    Direct Access    area and    Selections    tab if a space is available  for another button    When the Management Level is se
266. utton to be Cleared    Register   CardA   W 200 XH 300 mm  3 No Entry    No Entry        No Entry                         6 Touch  OK            Custom Paper Entry  B      CardA      This Setting will be  Cleared  Ok           Cancel   o                  Returns to the Custom Paper Entry Screen  The  selected paper size is deleted     7 Touch  Close      Returns to the Admin  Screen  Paper size is  updated     Registering a Custom Paper Size  Custom Paper Entry  181    Advanced Features    Keeping Masters Secure After Printing     Protect     After printing is completed  the master remains on the Print Drum  Cylinder   To protect confidential documents from  unauthorized duplication  use the Confidential feature to discard the master after printing   i e     Confidential    function   Used masters are held in the Master Disposal Box  The machine is equipped with a protection function to prevent the  master from being removed from the Master Disposal Box and leaked by any ill intended third party        Protect    Setting  When the    Protect    setting is ON     e When printing is complete  the    Confidential    function is activated to show the message to discard the master    remaining on the Print Drum  Cylinder      e The Master Disposal Box is locked and cannot be removed while the machine is in standby   However  the Master  Disposal Box can be unlocked and removed if the master is jammed in the Disposal Unit or the Master Disposal    Box is full      Locking the Maste
267. vily printed side     Preparing to Print 39    Basic Operations      For thick paper                         Press to open the two Paper Arrangers  right  and left  closer to the machine     Closing the Auto control Stacking Tray    Follow the steps below to close the Auto control Stack   ing Tray     Important      e If any printed copies remain on the Auto control Stack   ing Tray  press the Receiving Tray Paper Guides    Open   ing Button to remove them     1  Make sure there is no paper on the Auto control  Stacking Tray  then press the Receiving Tray  Paper Guides    Opening Button                             2  Fold in the Paper Stopper   3  Pull up the Paper Arrangers                                         5  Close the Auto control Stacking Tray     40 Preparing to Print       Basic Operations    Placing the original    When placing on the Glass Platen       Open the Platen Cover and place the original face  Note   down  Align the center of the original with the mark on   If the Gauge Cover is installed  place the original  the left hand side of the glass  After placing the original  underneath     slowly close the Platen Cover   Magazines  books  scrap books  etc  should be placed  on the Glass Platen             Gauge Cover    Grasp here  and lift up the  gauge cover    SS  Naw the original        face down                      When placing in the ADF unit  Option     Use the ADF unit if you are printing multiple originals in succession   Place originals so that the
268. y               0   115  117  121  171  173  Registering Administrator Users                0 00 120  Reminder Date 200    ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenreeteeeeees 160  Removing the Print Drum  Cylinder                  211  Rename  iii eign ie eee ieee 122  Rename Group          ccccccesseceeeesseeeeees 116  127  171  Rename Screen ou    eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeens 136  Renew Page            cccecceeeceeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 32  55  150  Replacing Batteries                     eeeeeeees 223  232  Replacing Consumables             cccceeteeeeeteees 202  Reproduction Size            ecccececceeeeeeeeteeeteeeseeeteaes 167  Reservation             cccecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeeees 148  Reserve Period          cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeneeeeees 169  Reset All User Counters            eceeceeseeeeeeeneees 128  Reset Counter onina 116  128  171  ReSet Key dann a 25  Retrieving a Program          cecceeceeseeeeeeeteeteeeteeeteees 137  Retrieving Stored Data 0 0    ce eeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeees 193  RISO Controller IS300 00 0    ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeees 256  RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER    oec 15    RISO Print  erreren deena 28  RISO Printer Driver          eeeeceeeeeeceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 15  RISO Stand D type  Il  oo    eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneees 256  RISO Stand N type  Il  rean 256  RISO USB PRINT MANAGER   o 15  RISO Utility Software oo    eee eee eeteeeteeeeeeeeeees 15  Rotate  a ccc 0 2 3 ihe ated lintel 91  S   Safety Guide ieedit 10  SCAN Mod    s ccccice
269. y     PIN Code  or connect the USB  Flash Drive that you already registered      Recognized by     USB Flash Drive   the fol   lowing message is displayed when touching   OK         This is already registered  Try another          Touch  Close  and input the unassigned  PIN Code or connect the unregistered USB  Flash Drive     Set various settings    Do the following settings if needed   e Rename   p 122    e Group   p 123    e Limit  p 123    e Disable    p 124     Setting Up User Management  User Management  121    Advanced Features    6 Touch  OK     Enter the User Name  Returns to the Create User Screen   The administrator or the user is registered     To register multiple users  touch  Register  and    Touch  Rename  on the Register  repeat steps 3 to 6     Screen     7 Touch  Close    Returns to the User Management Screen  Register    You can continue registering users and renaming  groups if needed   Rename   U 1 Input the PIN code    To close the User Management settings  touch   UF   Close  on the User Management Screen to J     return to the Admin  Screen  Limit J oFF     1 8 digits        2 Touch the character buttons to enter  a new name        Renare  m  RE ES ED ESRD ES 00 0S ES     CLIC ICICI GICIC IL Ie J  Cie JJ             Change capitalization by selecting the  Small  or   Capital  button      p 136   Note    e To clear the current name  touch button or  press the key     3 Touch  OK      Returns to the Register Screen   The user name is renamed        122 
270. ylinder   lower Print Position   Is sunlight directly hitting the The sensor is affected by direct sunlight   machine  Install shades or curtains  or move the    machine out of direct sunlight           When printing a multiple page   Is    Print in Units    option selected in Delete the current print job  Deselect    Print             computer file  the machine the Printer Driver  in Units     and resend the data to the  repeats the master making machine   process one page at a time  See p 48  step 3    p 55       Troubleshooting 253    Troubleshooting                Problem Possible Cause Action  The computer sent the file  but   Is the Admin  Screen currently Touch and switch to the Basic Screen  it was not received by the showing on the display  from the Admin  Screen   machine   The key is lighting  Received data is waiting for output    Press the key and proceed to print                 254 Troubleshooting    Troubleshooting    Troubleshooting 255    Appendix    Optional Accessories    A variety of optional accessories are available to enhance the capabilities of the machine   For details about the optional accessories  see your dealer  or authorized service representative        Auto Document Feeder AF VI II  Feed up to 50 sheets of originals automatically     Auto Document Feeder DX 1    Feed up to 50 sheets of originals automatically  Both sides of original can be scanned automatically       Color Drum  Cylinder     Simply change the Drum  Cylinder  to print in multi
271. ymptom    The machine failed to detect the original  document  The original document may  not be placed      Action   Re position the original       When resuming the print job   Touch  Continue      Alternatively  press the key to print    When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel      Alternatively  press the  lt 9  key or  the key to clear         Page Format is Larger  than Paper Size   I  Possible Ink Smudges  on Prints        Symptom   The printing paper is smaller than the  Master      Action   Use a correct size printer paper     When printing from the machine   Touch  Continue     You can also print by pressing the    key or the key      When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     You can also stop by pressing the    key or the key         Page Format is Larger  than Paper Size   I  Possible Ink Smudges  on Prints      Continue  gt PROOF Key      Symptom   The printing paper is smaller than the  Master      Action   Use a correct size printer paper     To override the message and to print  with possible Ink smears on the roller     Press the key     When stopping the print job   Touch  Cancel     You can also stop by pressing the    key or the key         Paper Size cannot be  Defined by Specified  Reproduction Size   Select Paper Size Manually     Symptom   The proper sized papers for the  specified reproduction size are not set      Action   Select the Paper Tray     To select the Paper Tray    Touch  Paper Select  or  Manual  Feed  to select the Paper Tray  
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
128-9254 T752 Quick Start Guide_SP.cdr  HP Deskjet D2400 Printer Series  Mercedes-Benz 2011 ML350 SUV Automobile User Manual  Samsung CLP-600 Benutzerhandbuch    WSJT-X User Guide  STADT ELECTRONIC IGNITION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  Garmin Approach G8 Owner's Manual  König & Meyer 17541  Chicago Electric 44568 Welder User Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file